Home

PanelMate Power Pro Configuration Editor Software User`s Guide

1. H 00 x P gt The Operator will appear in the Tag Exp and Ref Exp fields Tag Exp IPDUNT 2 gt Ref Exp B450 127 gt Error Continue repeating Steps 2 4 until the expression is completed Press the OK button to close the Expression Edit dialog box Operators Editing Tags Chapter 12 Using Tags 12 11 Your Configuration Editor can not edit a csv file You must use a third party software package such as Microsoft Excel or Notepad if you need to make changes to your csv file For convenience you can launch Excel or Notepad from your Configuration Editor Two launch points are available Tag Name File dialog box This dialog box is accessed from the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box Click on the Tag Name button to activate the Tag Name File dialog box Select the Excel or Notepad radio buttons and then press the Edit button This launches the selected program When you exit the program you will return to the Tag Name File dialog box Tag Name File for Device plc1 Current Selected Tag Name File Excel Po Tag Hame Column Reference Column z Line Select the Tag Start Line Expression Edit dialog box This dialog box is accessed by clicking on the E button from any dialog box containing PLC references fields In the Expression Edit dialog box click on either the Excel or Notepad button to launch the desired program When you exit the program you will retur
2. gt 0 lt 100 lt 0 123 gt 100 123 Target Word Address is 123 This expression limits entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register Any value outside this range has no effect on the value in the register Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Target Word Address Allows you to define the location of the operator s input in the PLC as the result of the Input For example to store a value in register 364 as a signed 16 bit integer use Target Word Address 364 S 16 Note that the example uses a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references If the template is configured to have numeric control a target address and input expression must be entered Failure to include this information will result in a Watchdog Time out error when the template is selected online Chapter 10 Templates 10 17 Password Protection Allows you to lock out access to numeric entry unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit The selections are listed below None Keyswitch Only Keyswitch and Password A Keyswitch and Password B Keyswitch and Password A or B Password A Only Password B Only Password A or B Password protection must be validated each time the template is selected for numeric entry The template will not be d
3. 7 c Step 4 A Message box will appear asking if you want to create cross reference information Both a NO or YES response will produce a csv file PanelM ate Configuration Editor A NO response will produce a simple Tag Name file with two columns of information the Tag Name and the Tag Reference A YES response will produce a Tag Name file with additional columns of data containing PLC cross reference information Samples of both types of csv files are shown in Step 6 Step 5 After selecting NO or YES the csv file is automatically generated and associated with the device in your configuration The Tag Name File dialog box will reappear displaying the reference data Tag Name File for Device plcl Ea Current Selected Tag Name File C PMCONFIG SORTER CSV Edi Tag Name Column Reference Column 1 Tag Name z 2 Reference z Line Select the Tag Start Line 1 CS Tag File Name SORTER CSY 2 PanelMate Configuration Name 15_TS_33 PPS 3 Device Name PLC1 Total Tags 27 E Name Reference 6 M0 01 M0 01 ZUMI M1 8 M12707 M12707 9 M12709 M12709 Although the csv file is now associated with your device and configuration it only contains tag reference data The reference data is displayed in both the Tag Name Column and the Reference Column To make the csv useful you will need to assign tag names to the references 7 Notepad a w Ex
4. Convert Verify References gt Tags Import Export Export As VCP Transter Print Ctrl F Exit The selections in the File Menu are described below Note that some of the selections are available from the toolbar Refer to the toolbar topic for more information Open Database Opens the Open Database dialog box and allows you to select a database Backup Database Opens the Backup Database dialog box and allows you to backup your database Close Closes the database Save Saves the highlighted configuration to the database Save As Opens the Save As dialog box This selection is used if you wish to save a configuration to the database under a new name Convert Opens the Conversion dialog box This selection is used if you wish to convert a configuration from one model to another e g PanelMate Power Series 2000 to PanelMate Power Series 3000 2 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Verify Opens the Verify Application dialog box This selection checks all PLC references and expressions References gt Tags Performs a reference to tag replacement operation Refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags for more information on this operation Import Opens the Import dialog box This selection allows you to import the selected configuration file into the database Export Opens the Export dialog box This selection allows you to export the selected configuration file from the database to a current versio
5. Decimal Places Allows you to determine how the number will be formatted when displayed This field accepts the numbers 0 through 9 Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the variable sized template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Variable Sized Readout Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access
6. Override Colors Allows you to select colors for a symbol that displays as a result of a conditional expression These colors are used instead of the colors defined when the symbol was created A symbol s objects for which the foreground or background is configured as None transparent are not affected by the Override Colors Pen Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the symbol The Pen button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Fill Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the symbol The Fill button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Alarm Alarm Allows you to designate any line of the template definition as an alarm state If the Alarm box is selected and the conditional expression evaluates to be true an alarm message will be placed in the alarm list and sent to the printer if one is configured If the Alarm box is selected the condition associated with the alarm will be monitored at all times regardless of the page being displayed Judicious use of the alarm state is recommended to maximize the response time of the PanelMate unit Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Acknowledge box is selected the operator must acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm
7. Password Protection Allows you to lock out access to numeric entry unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit The selections are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswitch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B Password protection must be validated each time the template is selected for numeric entry The template will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 17 Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC 11 18 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Readout Template Variable Sized Readout Templates are designed to replace numeric and digital readout devices found on a conventional control panel and to supply the functionality often provided by CRT based devices Displayed values can be scaled by the PanelMate unit without requiring any additional logic in the PLC gt RPM 1600 The Variable Sized Readout Template consists of t
8. T ALT 0142 ALT 0150 T ALT 0158 ALT 0166 i ALT4017 4 T ALT 018 M4 ALT 0190 it ALT 0198 ALT 0206 r ALT 0214 P ALT 0 222 ALT 0230 i ALT40238 ALT 0246 P ALT 0254 Chapter 4 Font Editor w g ALT 0127 F ALT 0135 T ALT 0143 ALT 0151 ALT 0159 9 ALT 0167 ALT 0175 ALT 0183 ALT 0191 k ALT 0199 i ALT 0207 a ALT 0215 B ALT 0223 ALT 0231 1 ALT 0239 ALT 0247 ALT 0255 4 9 4 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide French2 Font To enter the following characters press the recall key s Refer to the examples below Examples To enter the character I press the recall keys To enter the character C press the recall key C To enter the character press the recall keys ALT 0174 r h L d N B C D E F G I r N j H J K L M N O a P Q R 5 U Y W 1 i X Y Z I m Ba l FT Da amp F i i 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 lt gt gt A B C D E F G H I J K L MI N O P Q R T U V W X T Z ii _ a b C d e T g x T ALT 0128 ALT 0136 T ALT 0144 _ ALT 0152 ALT 0160 ALT 0163 ALT 0176 R ALT 0134 A ALT 0192 F ALT 0200 E ALT 0 208 5 ALT 02 15 ALT 0 2274 ALT40237 ALT 0740 ja ALT 0248 T ALT 0129 io ALT 0137 ALT 0145 rH ALT 0153 ALT 0161 ALT
9. 2 Click the object you wish to reshape An arc displays two handles squares and a polygon displays a handle at the ends and at each vertex corner 3 Place the cursor over a handle and it changes to a cross 4 Drag the handle to reshape the object Tip If the reshape tool is used on an arc and the cursor is inside the arc the arc is converted to a pie shape or a chord To add a node vertex to a polygon 1 Press the Ctrl key 2 Place the cursor on the line where you wish to add a node A plus sign appears 3 Click and drag the cursor away then release the Ctrl key To delete a node on a polygon 1 Place the cursor on the node you wish to delete A plus sign appears 2 Press the Ctrl key and click once to delete the node Line Tool The Line tool allows you to place a line object on the page Place the cursor on the configuration page press the mouse button and drag to create a line While using this tool press the Shift key to constrain the line to a 45 angle Rectangle Tool The Rectangle tool allows you to place a rectangle object on the page Place the cursor on the configuration page press the mouse button and drag to create a rectangle While using this tool press the Shift key to constrain the rectangle to a square Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 41 Ellipse Tool The Ellipse tool allows you to place an ellipse object on the page Place the cursor on the configuration page press the mouse bu
10. Cutler Hammer 173 Heatherdown Drive Westerville OH 43086 6166 PanelMate Power Pro Configuration Editor Software User s Guide The information contained in this manual is the property of Cutler Hammer Inc Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Cutler Hammer Inc Permission is granted to duplicate this material without modification only for your use or the internal use of other members of your company or your agents to assist you in the use and servicing of products purchased from Cutler Hammer No permission is granted to modify this material or include this material in a compilation Any Cutler Hammer software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the agreement RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in paragraph b 3 B of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DAR 7 104 9 a Contractor Manufacturer is Cutler Hammer P O Box 6166 Westerville OH 43086 6166 TRADEMARKS AcceleratI On TouchPanel PowerBlink PowerAnimation and PowerGraphics are trademarks of Cutler Hammer Inc PanelMate is a registered trademark of Cutler Hammer Inc Microsoft and Windo
11. T U V W x Y Z ii a b C d e T g x T ALT 0128 ALT 0136 T ALT 0144 ALT 0152 ALT 0160 ALT 0163 ALT 0176 a ALT 0184 H ALT 0192 E ALT 0200 D ALT 0208 5 ALT 02 15 ALT Q0 224 ALT 40732 ALT 0240 Q ALT 0248 T ALT 0129 FA ALT 0137 ALT 0145 m ALT 0153 ALT 0161 ALT 0169 ALT O177 i ALT 0185 A ALT 0193 F ALT 0201 ALT 0209 ALT 0217 a ALT 0225 ALT 0233 ii ALT 0241 ALT 0249 ALT 0130 ALT 0138 ALT 0146 ALT 0154 ALT 0162 d ALT 0170 z ALT 0178 ALT 0186 H ALT 0194 ALT 0202 i ALT 0210 ALT 0718 ALT 0226 ALT 02734 ALT 074 ALT 0750 f ALT 0131 ALT 0139 ALT 0147 gt ALT 0155 F ALT 163 lt ALT 10171 ALT 0179 ALT 0187 A ALT 0195 ALT 0203 0 ALT 0211 U ALT 0219 al a ALT Q227 ALT 0235 ALT 02743 ALT 02751 ALT 0132 if ALT 0140 ALT 0148 t ALT 0156 T ALT 0164 lt ALT 0172 ALT 0180 k ALT 0188 A ALT 0196 I ALT 0204 i ALT 0212 i ALT 0220 a ALT 0226 i ALT 02736 ALT 0744 T ALT 02757 ALT 0133 T ALT 0141 ALT 0149 T ALT 0157 ALT 0165 ALT 0173 LL ALT 0131 i ALT 0189 A ALT 0197 I ALT 0205 ALT 0213 e ALT 0271 ALT 0229 1 ALT40237 ALT 0245 ALT 0253 t ALT 0134
12. The message expression can contain multiple PLC references Note that the preceding examples are shown using a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references When the Message Expression is true embedded references are updated on the screen and not sent to the printer Messages configured for BOTH or PRINTER are sent to the printer when the Message Expression changes and also when changing pages Chapter 10 Templates 10 57 Note that when going to a new page that has non global messages messages set for PRINTER or BOTH will print once for each PLC reference in the message expression Non global messages on a page set for PRINTER or BOTH will print when returning from the Alarm Page Screen Blanking and when pressing the Enable Fault Relay control button since these actions are treated as page changes Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information The Display Template also supports the display of ASCII strings from the PLC To display ASCH strings place the starting address of the ASCII characters within the Message Expression field followed by the format specifier ASC which then is followed by the number of characters to be displayed When the PanelMate unit recognizes an ASCII format specifier FASC in the message expression the PanelMate unit will display the ASCII string from the PLC Optionally a byte swap fo
13. User Entry Soft Key Prompts When User Entry Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Optons 2A NN Perv C t tCV ULlCxa I i Startup Labels Standard i Allow Label Set Switching Enter ON Password At Label Category to Edit User Entry Soft Rey Prompts User Online Label Standard Online Label Enter Password Enter Password B Enter Passw AB Enter Old Password A Enter OUld Password B Enter NewePassword A Enter New Password B Reenter Hew Password Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when User Entry Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Enter Password A e Enter Password B e Enter Passw A B e Enter Old Password A e Enter Old Password B e Enter New Password A e Enter New Password B e Reenter New Password e Enter Date MM DD YY e Enter Time HH MM SS e Enter New Value 9 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Online Labels Setup Page When Setup Page is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels
14. e The Auto Centering attribute is lost during export V2 1X does not support auto centering Everything is exported as left justified e The Direct Select Touchscreen Only field is lost during export The Direct Select Touchscreen Only in the System Parameters field is not supported by V2 1X e Colors are converted to their closest match V2 1X configurations contain up to eight colors Some PanelMate Power Series configurations contain up to 256 colors e Blinking foreground colors are lost during export Blinking foreground colors are not supported by V2 1X e The default label Reset PLC Comm is changed to Enable Fault Relay PanelMate Power Series 1500 is exported as PanelMate Series 2000 PanelMate Series 3000 when going to V2 1 X The default label Reset PLC Comm does not exist e Maintenance Template options Allow on Page Enable Writes and Protection are lost during export Maintenance Templates are not supported by V2 1X e Some System Parameter fields are converted during export Scan Delays Screen Alarm Message and Trend are exported as part of the PLC Name and Port Table The Screen Blanking Inactivity Period is rounded to the nearest 20 minute interval The Control Bit Reset Delay is rounded to the nearest 250 mSec interval The Password Protection Time Out is rounded to the nearest five minute interval e The Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompts Contrast Adjustment Soft Key Prompts Touchscreen Button Templa
15. 0183 ALT 0191 i ALT 0199 i ALT 0207 a ALT 0215 B ALT 0223 5 ALT 0231 1 ALT 02739 ALT 0747 ij ALT 0255 4 11 4 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide German1 Font To enter the following characters press the recall key s Refer to the examples below Examples To enter the character press the recall keys To enter the character C press the recall key C To enter the character press the recall keys ALT 0174 j 1 L d N 2 B C D E F x L v N H l J K L M _ N gt s i P Q R T _ V lt Y Z gl r o amp l gt Cad P On Q 8 9 lt gt A B D E F H J K L M N P Q R S T U V X Y Z i a b C q e f m i 2 O 0 x T ALT 0128 ALT 0136 T ALT 0144 ALT 0152 ALT 0160 ALT 01686 ALT 0176 a ALT 0134 H ALT 0192 F ALT 0200 b ALT 0208 Al ALT 02716 ALT Q0224 ALT102737 ALT 0740 Q ALT 0243 T ALT 0129 a ALT 0137 ALT 0145 m ALT 0153 ALT 0161 ig ALT 0169 ALT 0177 i ALT 0185 A ALT 0193 F ALT 0201 ALT 0205 ALT 0217 a ALT 0225 ALT10733 ALT 0241 ALT 0249 ALT 0130 ALT 0138 ALT 0146 ALT 0154 ALT 0162 d ALT 0170 z ALT 0178 ALT 0186 H ALT 0194 ALT 0202 ALT 0710 ALT 0 18 a AL
16. 12 3 Tag Usage Overview 12 2 Tags Accessing 12 6 Tags Constructing Expressions 12 9 Tags Editing 12 11 Tags Using 12 1 Technical Support Fax III Technical Support HI Text Tool 2 41 Tool Palette 2 39 Toolbar 2 36 Troubleshooting the Configuration Editor F 2 U Unsolicited Device 7 7 Upgrade Database 2 6 Using Graphics from other Software D 2 V V2 11 Export Errors 2 7 V2 11 Export Guidelines 2 16 Variable Sized Bar Template 11 7 Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab 11 12 Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control 11 13 Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control 11 15 Variable Sized Bar Template Expressions Tab 11 10 Variable Sized Bar Template VS Bar Attributes Tab 11 8 Variable Sized Bar Template Tool 2 45 Variable Sized Control Button Template 11 44 Variable Sized Control Button Template Control Definitions Tab 11 47 Variable Sized Control Button Template VS Control Button Attributes Tab 11 45 Variable Sized Control Button Tool 2 45 Variable Sized Display Template 11 29 Variable Sized Display Template Control Definitions Tab 11 35 Variable Sized Display Template Expressions Tab 11 32 Variable Sized Display Template VS Display Attributes Tab 11 30 l 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Display Template Tool 2 45 Variable Sized Graphic Template 11 37
17. 242 in PLC namel is added to word 243 in PLC name 2 Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Note that Line Trend Templates will not update if all references in these templates are unsolicited If at least one reference in a Line Trend Template is not unsolicited then all references will update When floating point references are used be certain the maximum possible value will not exceed the PanelMate unit s unsigned 32 bit word limit 4 294 967 295 A value exceeding the limit will cause a Watchdog Time out error or generate an Exception error during online or runtime operation You may wish to consider using scaled integer values instead of floating point values High Alarm Expression Allows you to enter a High Alarm Expression The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression If Value exceeds the High Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the trend sample will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units the trend sample is displayed in the color defined in the Alarm Color field The trend sample will continue to be displayed in the alarm color as other trend samples are being collected as long as Value exceeds the High Alarm Expression value A High Alarm bar is shown in high intensity to the left of the Line Trend Template e For PanelMate Color units the trend sample is displayed in the
18. Display Attributes Control Definitions Template Size in Cells Height 1 Width E Refresh Affected Graphics Online Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression A The fields in the Display Template Display Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Template Size In Cells Height Displays the height of the Display Template as 1 This value cannot be changed Width Allows you to enter the width of the Display Template as 3 4 or 5 e A 3 wide template can display a message of up to 36 normal font characters e A 4 wide template can display up to 49 characters e A 5 wide template can display up to 62 characters Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Display Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Vi
19. Expressions Tab 10 56 Display Template Tool 2 45 Driver Help Files B 2 Dynamic Graphics Feature 1 3 E Edit Menu 2 22 Editing Graphics E 2 Ellipse Tool 2 41 E mail and Website Address II Emergency Technical Support III English Font 4 4 Export As 2 13 Export 2 12 Features 1 3 File Menu 2 3 Font Editor 4 2 French Font 4 8 French2 Font 4 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide G GE Fanuc Genius I O 7 13 Generic Protocol 7 8 Genius I O 7 13 German Font 4 12 Graphic Font 4 18 Graphics Editing E 2 Graphics from other Software D 2 Greyscale Color Feature 1 4 H Help Menu 2 34 High Capacity Unit Feature 1 3 Import 2 11 Indicator Template 10 2 Indicator Template Control Definitions Tab 10 7 Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Tab 10 3 Indicator Template Indicator States Tab 10 5 Indicator Template Tool 2 44 Information Fax Back Service III Installing the Configuration Software 1 2 K Keyboard Shortcuts E 2 L Line Tool 2 40 Line Trend Template 10 45 Line Trend Template Control Definitions Tab 10 52 Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes Tab 10 46 Line Trend Template Pen Definitions Tab 10 49 Line Trend Template Tool 2 44 Main Screen 2 2 Make Symbol 2 30 Message Library 8 2 Modicon Modbus Feature 1 3 N New Configuration 3 3 New Configuration Page 3 5 O Object Menu 2 24 Object Prope
20. Left Display Always Control Label PLC Bit Relerence 1 Control Indicator Control Label Fg Eei E Bg The Variable Sized Display Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box defines the control buttons on your PanelMate unit If a control button is defined a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a control button is pressed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to 0 thus providing a momentary input to the PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic The fields in the Variable Sized Display Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Indicator Position Allows you to select the position inside of the Variable Sized Display Template for control indicator arrow The selections are listed below Left e Below e Right e Above Display Allows you to determine if the arrow will always be visible or visible only when the template is selected The selections are Always and On Selection Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control button labels and the associated PLC Bit Reference Line corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all cont
21. When the Configurations icon a PanelMate model icon or a configuration name icon is selected and the New button is clicked in the Database Treeview Window the New Configuration dialog box appear Hew Configuration Preview Product Type PanelMate 1500 Configuration Hame Untitled Description Product Options r Auto Centering Color Display Allen Bradley DH 485 Device Names High Capacity Unit Modicon Modbus Indicator Labels Advanced Trending Template Dynamic Graphics Control Button Labels 256 Greyscale Color Model 1555 1575 The New Configuration dialog box allows you to create a new configuration The fields in the New Configuration dialog box are described below Product Type Allows you to select the product for which the configuration is being created Preview Displays a generalized view of the selected product type Configuration Name Allows you to enter the name of the configuration Description Allows you to enter a brief description of the configuration 3 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Product Features The following Product Features can also be selected in the Configuration Properties dialog box Color Display Allows you to select a color configuration If this box is not checked the configuration will be grayscale High Capacity Unit Allows you to create a larger number of pages and messages than permitted
22. e High and low alarm levels Refer to the Variable Sized Bar Template topic for more information Variable Sized Readout Template Tool The Variable Sized Readout Template tool allows you to place a Variable Sized Readout Template on the page Variable Sized Readout Templates are designed to replace numeric and digital readout devices found on a conventional control panel and to supply the functionality often provided by CRT based devices Refer to the Variable Sized Readout Template topic for more information Variable Sized Display Template Tool The Variable Sized Display Template tool allows you to place a Variable Sized Display Template on the page Variable Sized Display Templates are designed to replace LED or LCD message units or display readouts Refer to the Variable Sized Display Template topic for more information Variable Sized Graphic Template Tool The Variable Sized Graphic tool allows you to place a Variable Sized Graphic Template on the page Variable Sized Graphic Templates consists of one or more symbols and are used to indicate the status of a device and to control the device e g by turning it ON or OFF Refer to the Variable Sized Graphic Template topic for more information Variable Sized Control Button Tool The Variable Sized Control Button tool allows you to place a Variable Sized Control Button Template on the page Variable Sized Control Button Templates are used to provide momentary control to the PLC or to
23. gt 500 This conditional expression resolves to true if the value of word 35 is greater than 500 gt 0 lt 100 lt 0 123 gt 100 123 This conditional expression limits entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register Any value outside this range has no effect on the value in the register Trigonometry Function Examples sin 1 will return the sine of the contents of register 1 abs 1 will return the absolute value of the contents of register 1 A 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Bit wise Function Examples using 8 bits Bit wise functions produce numerical answers based on the numerical values of the operands and the operation being performed Assume 1 contains the value 5 0000 0101 binary and 1 contains the value 6 0000 0110 binary 1 0000 0101 1111 1010 1 amp 2 0000 0101 amp 0000 0110 0000 0100 4 1 I 2 0000 0101 0000 0110 0000 0111 1 2 0000 0101 0000 0110 0000 0011 1 gt gt 2 0000 0101 gt gt 2 0000 0001 1 1 lt lt 3 0000 0101 lt lt 3 0010 1000 40 Logical Function Examples Logical functions produce answers that are either TRUE 1 or FALSE 0 by performing operations on their operands using either their numerical value for comparisons or their logical value such that FALSE 0 and TRUE anything but 0 zero Assume that the address 1 contains the value 5 the address 1 contains the value 6 and
24. refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as is enter in the field Refer to the examples below 32 5 9 The operator s input is changed from Fahrenheit to Celsius 2 gt 0 lt 100 2 lt 0 123 gt 100 123 Target Word Address is 123 This expression limits entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register Any value outside this range has no effect on the value in the register Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Target Word Address Allows you to define the location of the operator s input in the PLC as the result of the Input For example to store a value in register 364 as a signed 16 bit integer use Target Word Address 364 S 16 Note that the example uses a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references If the template is configured to have numeric control a target address and input expression must be entered Failure to include this information will result in a Watchdog Time out error when the template is selected online If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags
25. the Ls button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 10 Templates 10 11 Readout Template Expressions Tab The Readout Template Expressions Tab dialog box is shown below Readout Template Readout Attributes Expressions vwe a Dgedbond fo a Value 2 a X Alarm Acknowledge High Alarm E k Low Alarm The fields in the Readout Template Expressions Tab dialog box are described below Value 1 Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Readout Template When viewing the Readout Template Value 1 will be in the center of the template The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations The following examples of expressions use a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references 123 The expression can be a single word reference This example references word 123 123 10 124 This mathematical expression includes PLC references and constants that solve to a value namel1 242 name2 243 Information from multiple PLCs can be included in the same expression In this e
26. 0169 ALT D177 1 ALT 0185 A ALT 0193 F ALT 0201 ALT 0209 ALT 0217 ALT 0225 ALT 0233 i ALT 0241 ALT 0249 ALT 0130 ALT 0138 ALT 0146 ALT 0154 ALT 0152 d ALT 0170 z ALT 0178 ALT 0186 H ALT 0194 ALT 0202 0 ALT 0210 ALT 0218 ALT 0226 ALT 02734 T ALT 074 ALT 0250 f ALT 0131 z ALT 0139 ALT 0147 gt ALT 0155 r ALT Q0163 lt ALT 0171 ALT 0179 gt gt ALT 0187 H ALT 0195 ALT 0203 i ALT 0211 U ALT 0219 all a ALT4 0 227 o ALT40235 ALT 0743 ALT 0751 ALT 0132 if ALT 0140 ALT 0148 te ALT 01756 oO ALT 0164 4 ALT 0172 ALT 0180 k ALT 0188 A ALT 0196 I ALT 0204 i ALT 0212 I ALT 0220 E ALT 0228 i ALT 02736 T ALT 0744 Ul ALT 02757 ALT 0133 T ALT 0141 ALT 0149 i ALT 0157 ae ALT 0165 ALT 0173 Lt ALT 01481 i ALT 0189 H ALT 0197 ALT 0205 ALT 0213 7 ALT 0221 ALT 0229 1 ALT 07237 ALT 0245 ALT 0253 Chapter 4 Font Editor t ALT 0134 T ALT 0142 ALT 0150 T ALT 0158 ALT 0166 1i ALT4017 4 T ALT D182 34 ALT 0130 ALT 0198 ALT 0206 i ALT 0214 P ALT 0222 ALT 0230 i ALT40238 ALT 0746 ALT 0254 W g ALT 0127 F ALT 0135 T ALT 0143 ALT 0151 ALT 0159 ALT 0167 ALT 0175 ALT
27. 0236 ALT 02d4 LI ALT 025 ALT 0143 0 ALT 0141 ALT 0149 l ALT O15F i ALT 0165 ALT 0173 l AL T D1B1I 1 ALT 0189 A ALT 0147 ALT 0205 i ALT 0213 T ALT 0221 ALT 0229 ALT 0237 m ALT 02d5 LI ALT 0253 Chapter 4 Font Editor ALT 0134 l ALT o14 ALT 0150 O ALT 015 amp ALT 0166 ALT 0174 T ALT 0182 y ALT 0190 A ALT 0148 ALT 0206 ALT 0214 P ALT 0222 ALT 0230 ALT 0239 ALT 0246 h ALT 0254 W ALT 0127 ALT 0135 l ALT 0143 ALTtO15 Y ALT 01549 5 ALT O167 ALT 0175 ALT 0103 ALT 0191 ALT 0149 ALT 0207 ALT 0215 B ALT 0223 ALT 0231 4 ALT 0239 ALT 02d st ALT 0255 4 15 4 16 Configuration Editor User s Guide Swedish1 Font To enter the following characters press the recall key s Refer to the examples below Examples To enter the character O press the recall keys X To enter the character C press the recall key C To enter the character press the recall keys ALT 0174 r 1 L d W J A B C D E F r 4 i x i k H J K Mi N i P Q R T J Y A X Y Z SA H oF amp i E 1 2 3 4 5 5 8 9 lt gt w A B G D E F H J K L M N P O R s I LI V x Z a b C d f x ALT 0128 ALT 0196 ALT 0144 m ALT 01
28. 1 has the highest priority and line 5 has the lowest When an expression results in an invalid equation e g division by zero etc no value or graphics are displayed If a true expression goes false in a later scan the display for the true expression is erased If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information 11 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide Colors Pen Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the template The Pen button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Fill Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the template The Fill button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Alarm Alarm Allows you to designate any line of the template definition as an alarm state If the Alarm box is selected and the conditional expression evaluates to be true an alarm message will be placed in the alarm list and sent to the printer if one is configured If the Alarm box is selected the condition associated with the alarm will be mo
29. 27 1997 00 00 00 December 27 1997 Remote Mode Change Allows the PanelMate unit to accept remote mode changes from Run Mode to Transfer Mode or vice versa from a personal computer over a network It also determines the manner in which the remote mode change will occur The selections are listed below NEVER A remote mode change is not allowed IMMEDIATE The remote mode change will occur instantly DEFAULT The remote mode change will occur when the PanelMate unit is in a default state no templates or symbols are selected on screen ACCEPT An operator must accept the remote mode change at the online unit 6 14 Configuration Editor User s Guide Page Change with Delay Example The ladder program below shows a page change with a time delay Timer 1 T 1 SEC T SOUPCE 5 Destination F 1 2 L Source 99gy Destination Fil This ladder program will allow the operator to change pages by pressing a control button on the PanelMate unit The second move ensures that there will be a change in the register next time Il is pressed Note that the timers can be adjusted to lengthen or shorten the time delay Page Change with Delay Example 14 System Parameters Password Tab 6 System Parameters 1 2 System Parameters Remote Tab 11 System Parameters Communications Tab 9 System Parameters General Tab 3 Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 1 PLC Name and Port Table In this chapter you will learn e Abou
30. ALT 0166 G ALT 0174 T ALT 0182 yi ALT 0130 ALT 0198 ALT 0206 ALT 0214 b ALT 0222 ALT 0230 ALT 0238 n ALT 02a6 h ALT 0254 Ww ALT O127 i ALT 0145 ll ALT 0143 ALT 0151 Y ALT 0159 z ALT O167 ALT 0175 ALT 0104 ALT 0191 C ALT 0199 ALT o 07 ALT 0215 B ALT 223 ALT 0231 4 ALT 0239 ALT 0247 4 ALT 0255 4 17 4 18 Configuration Editor User s Guide Graphic Font To enter the following characters press the recall key s Refer to the examples below Examples To enter the character al press the recall keys Q To enter the character press the recall key N ami mn 9 Cm La ae A E l B J R s O Na y c m B K D g s L m TI 1 t C Su MT i gm D LW _ M i F N V FA yo r J yv m h r O Q7 N sm l ALT 0123 ALT 0136 ALT 0144 ALT 0152 ALT 0160 ALT 0163 ALT 0176 ALT 0184 ALT 0192 ALT 0200 ALT 0208 ALT 0216 ALT 0 224 ALT 0237 ALT 0240 ALT 0243 ALT 0129 ALT 0137 ALT 0145 ALT 0153 ALT 0161 ALT 0169 ALT 177 ALT 0185 ALT 0193 ALT 0201 ALT 0209 ALT 0217 ALT 0225 ALT 0233 ALT 02741 ALT 0249 ALT 0130 ALT 0138 ALT 0146 ALT 0154
31. CT a The Font Editor dialog box allows you to edit existing characters or create new characters while still viewing the page layout The three buttons at the top of the Font Editor dialog box are described below m This button will set all pixels to white in the 8x16 pixel box LI This button will set all pixels to black in the 8x16 pixel box Ld This button will invert all pixels to the opposite color 1 e black pixels to white pixels and white pixels to black pixels in the 8x16 pixel box The 8x16 pixel box gives you the ability to create custom characters by redefining or creating a new character in the 8 x 16 pixel bitmap box for each character The character set may be selected in the Normal Font to Use field and the font may be selected in the Selected Font field The fields in the Font Editor dialog box are described below Normal Font to Use Allows you to select a character set The character sets are listed below e English e Danishl e HTFrenchl e HTFrench2 e Germanl e Spanishl e Swedishi Chapter 4 Font Editor 4 3 Selected Font Allows you to select the font to edit The selections available are Normal Graphics Double High and Quad To view the Normal characters refer to the English Font topic To view Graphic characters refer to the Graphics Font topic Note that the Double High and Quad fonts are only available if you selected the Redefine Quad Font or Redefine Double High Font fields in the Sys
32. Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Name Max Cal Min Cal Value Expression Line 1 in this list box corresponds to the top pen line 2 corresponds to the next pen etc It is not necessary to use all pens If you do not want a particular pen leave the line blank If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Name Allows you to enter a name for the pen The Name field accepts alphanumeric characters Units Allows you to define the type of units that will be displayed to the operator such as Deg F or gals The Units field accepts alphanumeric characters Pen Color Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the pen The Pen Color button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Alarm Color Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the pen when the monitored value goes into an alarm condition The Alarm Color button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Max Calibration Allows you to determine the highest point of the line trend This value displays on the template This six character text box accepts 6 digits or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the field Min Calibration Allows you to determin
33. Equal Size Makes two or more selected objects equal in size to the last object selected Note that you can make objects lines rectangles etc equal size but you cannot make templates equal size Width Makes the objects equal in width Height Makes the objects equal in height Both Makes the objects equal in both width and height Reshape Displays vertical box handles on the selected polygon or arc Drag the handles to re shape the object Make Symbol Opens the Make Symbol dialog box This selection will make a symbol from a group of selected objects lines rectangles etc Break Symbol Breaks a symbol into the original component objects 2 26 Configuration Editor User s Guide Object Properties When you choose the Properties selection under the Object Menu or double click on any object on a page the Object Properties dialog box for that object will appear Object Properties is a set of three tabbed dialog boxes used to select the object s attributes location size and visibility The dialog boxes are listed below e Object Properties Attributes Tab e Object Properties Location And Size Tab e Object Properties Visibility Tab Tip The Object Properties Visibility Tab dialog box only appears when you double click on a Text object Note that it is not possible to resize a fixed template with the size handles To resize a fixed template you must use the Object Properties dialog box Chapter 2 Main Sc
34. Exception error during online or runtime operation You may wish to consider using scaled integer values instead of floating point values Value 2 Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Bar Trend Template When viewing the Bar Trend Template Value 2 will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units Value 2 is displayed as a high intensity bar to the left of the Value 1 bar e For PanelMate Color units Value 2 is displayed as a white horizontal bar to the left of the Value 1 bar It is most often used as the setpoint for the device The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Note that Bar Trend Templates will not update if all references in these templates are unsolicited If at least one reference in a Bar Trend Template is not unsolicited then all references will update When floating point references are used be certain the maximum possible value will not exce
35. Expressions Value 1 Max Calibration 100 00 Value 2 Caf Min Calibration 0 0000 High Alarm L J Deadband p x Range Low Alarm O N Alarm Acknowledge The fields in the Bar Template Expressions Tab dialog box are described below Value 1 Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Bar Template When viewing the Bar Template Value 1 will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units Value 1 is displayed as a high intensity bar on the template e For PanelMate Color units Value 1 is displayed as a green bar on the template The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags The following examples of expressions use a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references 123 The expression can be a single word reference This example references word 123 123 10 124 This mathematical expression includes PLC references and cons
36. F7 3 619 52 6 1 9 5 2 0 F7 2 619 52 619 52 F6 2 619 52 619 52 F5 3 61952 F5 1 619 52 619 5 D7 619 52 619 520 D6 619 52 619 52 D5 619 52 619 5 D4 619 52 6 2 0 D3 619 52 6 2 0 E12 4 619 52 6 1952E 02 E12 3 619 52 6 195 E 02 A 16693 A 5 Chapter 8 Message Library 8 11 Clock and Calendar References within Messages Time and date information from the PanelMate unit s internal clock can be included in messages sent to the screen and or printer The Clock and Calendar Access formats are as follows mon day year hour min sec time date clk month day year hour 24 hour time format minutes seconds hour minute second month day year hour minute second month day year Note the following items Parameter names are not case sensitive e This information is updated when the page is displayed but is not updated dynamically 8 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide Chapter 9 System Online Labels 9 1 System Online Labels In this chapter you will learn e About the System Online Labels 9 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Online Labels When System Online Labels is selected from the Database Treeview Window the System Online Labels dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Options r Preview Startup Labels Standard Allow Label Set Switching Label Category to Edit Miscellane
37. ID box in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box Name Allows you to define names for each device to be addressed This name is used when specifying word and bit addresses during page development Type Defines the addressing method octal or decimal to be used in the PanelMate unit ID included Specifies whether the ID number of the PanelMate unit will be used in the communication frames BCC Bit included Specifies whether each Generic Protocol frame includes BCC Bit error checking for the frame For more information about Generic Protocol refer to the Generic Protocol Communication Driver Manual Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 9 AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address To configure the AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address dialog box the following steps must be completed 1 The Allen Bradley DH 485 box must be selected in the New Configuration dialog box or the Configuration Properties dialog box 2 A port must be selected and Allen Bradley Data Highway 485 must be selected in the Device Use field in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box 3 Click the DH 485 button and the AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address dialog box will appear The AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address dialog box is shown below AE DH 485 Maximum Node Address PORTH 2 Maximum Node Address a z The AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address dialog box is used to select the maximum node address of the DH 485 network The fields in the AB DH 485 Maximum Node Addr
38. Pro operator station may be used as a DDE Client i e obtain data from another Windows program Examples of other applications that may be used as DDE Servers to the PanelMate PC Pro operator station are listed below e A weigh scale feeder system that has a serial communication interface program running on the personal computer and with DDE Server capability e An SPC package that performs statistical calculations on data read from the PLC by the PanelMate PC Pro operator station PanelMate PC Pro acting as a DDE Server and provides results to the PanelMate operator station for display PanelMate PC Pro acting as a DDE Client The following example outlines how to configure a PanelMate PC Pro operator station as a DDE Client 1 Open the PLC Name and Port Table In the Device Use field select DDE Server PLC Name and Port Table Fa r Port Parameters Port Device Use Local ID 1 DDE Server B 2 No Usage Port Settings 140 Unequipped No interface board Unsolicited Device Device Use Local ID DDE Server El 0 r PLC Name Parameters item Name Port Model Remote Tag File Path amp Name i 7 en 1 EXCEL1 2 lt New entry gt Name EXCELI Model zi DDE Setup Tag File Port fi Remote ID fo Dorai EBl 2 Inthe Name field enter the logical device s name In this example the name is EXCEL 1 gt d m gt x w m Le 3 Click on the Add button The device s name w
39. Screen Blanking feature instead of the Windows screen saver Automatic Cancel Determines the time the PanelMate unit waits without operator input before de selecting a template This function helps prevent accidental usage of the control buttons if you leave a template or variable sized template selected after use Any operator input resets the Automatic Cancel timer Note that the Automatic Cancel time out also resets the Screen Blanking timer 6 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Fonts Redefine Quad Font Allows you to re define the Quad Font When the Redefine Quad Font box is selected custom characters can be created in the Font Editor Refer to the Font Editor topic for more information Redefine Double High Font Allows you to re define the Double High font When the Redefine Double High Font box is selected custom characters can be created in the Font Editor Refer to the Font Editor topic for more information Enable Extended Fonts Allows you to extend the character set from 128 characters to 256 characters The extended characters can be customized Refer to table in the Selected Font section in the Font Editor topic for more information Page Startup Page Number Allows you to enter the page number of the page to be displayed first when the PanelMate unit enters the Run Mode Control Bit Reset Delay Sets the delay between the bit set and bit clear commands sent to a PLC from the control buttons Since co
40. Send To Rear Sends a selected object to the rear bottom of a stack of objects Align Left Aligns all selected objects along the left edge of the last object selected Align Center Aligns all selected objects along the vertical centerline of the last object selected Align Right Aligns all selected objects along the right edge of the last object selected Double High E Select Font Select a font for the selected text object Fill Colors This button consists of two parts Click the paint can icon to fill the selected object with the color shown in the box Click the arrow icon to display the Color Selection Palette m Pen Colors This button consists of two parts Click the pencil icon to set the pen color of the selected object to the color shown in the box Click the arrow icon to display the Color Selection Palette a Pen Width Choose a pen width for the selected object Note that the Pen Width value in the Toolbar is not fully visible when using a large font video driver o Help Makes context sensitive help available When you click this button the cursor displays a question mark Then click most on screen features for context sensitive help Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 37 Color Selection Palette When you click the down arrow buttons on the Pen Color button or Fill Color button in the toolbar the Color Selection Palette will appear EEREEEH The Color Selection palette allows you to select pen color or shade a
41. Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator Attributes Tab Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator States Tab Vanlable sized Bar Template ez us yum m mut m a w uu Variable Sized Bar Template VS Bar Attributes Tab iv Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Bar Template Expressions Tab ccccccccccccesssssesseseeeeeeceeeeeeeesaeaaaaseeenees 11 10 Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab 11 12 Variable sized Readout Template ssid acvenecadwesinundwscecau tleantad a E 11 18 Variable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Tab 11 19 Variable Sized Readout Template Expression Tab 11 21 Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab 11 23 Variable Siz d Display Pemipl ate uuu uu y m S uuu ae 11 29 Variable Sized Display Template VS Display Attributes Tab 11 30 Variable Sized Display Template Expressions Tab 11 32 Variable Sized Display Template Control Definitions Tab 11 35 Varlable Sizeq Graphie Temp ru usu ias N
42. Tab dialog box are described below Device Name Allows you to enter a device name The device name will display in the upper area of the template in the normal font You may press the Return key to Insert a carriage return The Device Name field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Device Name check the Device Names box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box Note that the name used in the Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 22 characters for the Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Device Name field allows you to enter more than 22 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Template Size In Cells Height Allows you to enter the height of the Line Trend Template as 1 2 or 3 The height of the Line Trend Template determines the number of trend samples that can be displayed at one time Width Allows you to enter the width of the Line Trend Template as 2 3 4 or 5 Chapter 10 Templates 10 47 Trigger Type Allows you to select the trigger type for the trending The selections are described below Interval Allows you to sample a trend value when a time period has elapsed The Interval in conjunction with the Trend Scan Delay designates the time interval between trend sample
43. Template Tool sirisser aa erana aaa a niaaa 2 45 Vanable Ssized Bar Template Top u up n A a 2 45 Vablable Sizeq Readout Template Tool u u uum u Su mu uum m my u n a a aa 2 45 Variable Sized Display Template Tool 2 45 Nanables5izod Graphic TompiaterToplu uy u u t T a ns 2 45 Vanable sized Control Button Tool u u uy uu uuu uuu sss 2 45 Chapter 3 Database Treeview Wi deowiuu u 2 a a 3 1 Database Treeview Wind OW six uysal aya aoa ananman 3 2 New OC BE AU Orgy ore u un u um SD nu akhu u Du n ss attus nasa m Qa 3 3 New Conii surat OM Pant e uD L S su a uuu EE Skskaaaa sawas ugsabusssa 3 5 COMMOUTALION PIO PCIUICS S u uu u uu sS Du i uu aS SSD loonadalsascadeubaceouestencouestouaues 3 6 Pase PrOpemie sx 25 sc um au um u DS SOS aS SS Susa ua aaa eee Ska 1 sbss 3 10 Chapterd FEo ntt EEHtopu aaa a aaa asa ai 4 1 ontlilllois musu a u usa a s s sI A pu sam nasa u aut saa sa suu 4 2 polisin susunan a nka hum ukham sultan sdwanes wanes ian aS 4 4 Panish l FON u unamasa amu u mamaku apaspa a asa E E AE 4 6 ING NERON ee a E uspasasanastastapsauhasastuzsaspayma qusanpa sess secant 4 8 J Khipu am a ta eaten eee nce A E teat ate uate Sama uuu ua E aaa sasa 4 10 Geran POI Guss usuy p S a a ania tls outa suyuku ut u tases 4 12 Spani Nl FoM cuu usun km um baa kam hap qam hkias baa sag 4 14 SW CIS HE OME uuyma na iqu tatu A a E g Ssa tunas pa sayata 4 16 Gio phu OM sxs
44. Variable Sized Graphic Template Control Definitions Tab 11 42 Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphic States Tab 11 40 Variable Sized Graphics Template VS Graphic Attributes Tab 11 38 Variable Sized Graphic Template Tool 2 45 Variable Sized Indicator Template 11 2 Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator Attributes Tab 11 3 Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator States Tab 11 5 Variable Sized Indicator Template Tool 2 45 Variable Sized Readout Template 11 18 Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab 11 23 Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control 11 24 Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control 11 26 Variable Sized Readout Template Expressions Tab 11 21 Variable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Tab 11 19 Variable Sized Readout Template Tool 2 45 Verification Status 2 15 Verify Application 2 10 View Menu 2 32 W Website and E mail Address III Window Menu 2 33 Word References C 2
45. W To enter the character C press the recall key C To enter the character press the recall keys ALT 0174 r 7 A B N H J f i P Q R X Y Z 1 2 8 9 A B H l J P Q R X Y Z a b L C K f _ l d en i E M fo x T O G x I ALT 0128 ALT 0136 lI ALT 0144 m ALT 0152 ALT 0160 ALT 159 ALT 0176 1 ALT 0184 A ALT 0142 E ALT 0700 hb ALT O208 ALT 0216 a ALT 0224 ALT 0232 I T 2 3 5 ALT 0248 D ALT 0129 ALT U137 ALT 0145 ALT 0153 ALT 0161 g ALT 0169 ALT 017 ALT 01785 A ALT 0143 E ALT 0701 i ALT 0209 i ALT 0217 ALT 0225 ALT 0233 m ALT 0241 Li ALT 0249 ALT 0130 5 ALT U138 ALT 0146 ALT 0154 t ALT 152 i ALT 0170 2 ALT 0179 ALT 01706 m R ALT 134 E ALT 0707 ALT 0210 ALT 0218 ALT 0 76 AL T 234 ALT 02742 Li ALT 0250 ALT 0191 L ALT 0139 ALT O14 y ALT 0155 T dea ALT 0163 ALT 0171 3 ALT 0179 a gt ALT 0187 A ALT 01495 E ALT 02703 ALT U211 U ALT 0219 ALT 227 e ALT 0235 ALT 02d3 LI ALT O2751 ALT 0132 l ALT 0140 ALT 0148 te ALT 0156 y ALT 0164 ALT O0172 ALT 0100 Xi ALT 0188 A ALT 01496 T ALT 0704 ALT 02712 AL
46. an entry in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box and make a change to the Name Port Model and Remote ID fields you can click the Change button to change an entry in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box lt Copy gt Allows you to copy a selected entry In the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box If you select an entry in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box and you can click the Copy button to copy an entry After copying you can use the Paste button to paste a copy of the entry elsewhere in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box lt Delete gt Allows you to remove an entry from the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box If you select an entry in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box and click the Delete button the entry will be removed lt Paste gt Allows you to paste an entry after copying an entry from the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box If you select an entry in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box and click the Paste button the entry will be pasted after the entry you selected lt Tag File gt Displays the Tag Name File dialog box The Tag File button appears when you select any PLC in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box Refer to the Tag Name File topic and Chapter 12 Using Tags for more information lt OPC Setup gt This button only appears when OPC Server is selected in the Device Use field and a device name is selected in the PLC Name Parameters that is assigned to the OPC Server It is used to define
47. and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as is enter in the field Refer to the examples below 32 5 9 The operator s input is changed from Fahrenheit to Celsius 2 gt 0 lt 100 2 lt 0 123 gt 100 123 Target Word Address is 123 This expression limits entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register Any value outside this range has no effect on the value in the register Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Target Word Address Allows you to define the location of the operator s input in the PLC as the result of the Input For example to store a value in register 364 as a signed 16 bit integer use Target Word Address 364 S 16 Note that the example uses a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the template is configured to have
48. as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as is enter in the field Refer to the examples below 32 5 9 The operator s input is changed from Fahrenheit to Celsius gt 0 lt 100 lt 0 123 gt 100 123 Target Word Address is 123 This expression limits entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register Any value outside this range has no effect on the value in the register Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Target Word Address Allows you to define the location of the operator s input in the PLC as the result of the Input For example to store a value in register 364 as a signed 16 bit integer use Target Word Address 364 S 16 Note that the example uses a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references 10 44 Configuration Editor User s Guide If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access t
49. be edited using keys on the keyboard For information on editing objects using the keyboard refer to the Editing Graphics topic The selections in the Edit Menu are described below Note that some of the selections are available from the toolbar Refer to the toolbar topic for more information Undo Reverses the last operation you performed For example if you cut an object Undo makes it re appear There are several levels of Undo the exact number depends upon your memory resources Redo Reverses the effect of the last Undo command There are several levels of Redo the exact number depends upon your memory resources Cut Erases a selected object s from the screen and places the object s on the Windows clipboard Copy Copies a selected object s to the Windows clipboard but does not erase the object s from the screen Paste Copies object s from the Windows clipboard into the current configuration page It is not recommended to copy and paste bitmaps to and from the clipboard To insert a bitmap use the bitmap tool on the tool palette Tip Graphics can be pasted from other software packages onto a configuration page Refer to the Using Graphics from Other Software topic for more information Tip Complex objects pasted into a configuration should be re sized using the software package in which the drawing was created Copying objects to the clipboard from other software packages tends to multiply the number of objects Att
50. by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 37 Variable Sized Graphic Template Variable Sized Graphic Templates are similar in function and purpose to Indicator Templates except that the Indicator Template uses a pre defined graphic while the Variable Sized Graphic Template uses user defined symbols for status indication For more information on creating symbols refer to the Make Symbol topic Variable Sized Graphic Templates can be used to indicate the status of a device and to control the device e g by turning it ON or OFF There are five lines to define the various states of the device To tie a state to information in the PLC a conditional expression may be entered which when evaluated to true displays the characteristics defined in the Pen and Fill fields for the Variable Sized Graphic Template The expression may be as simple as the condition of a single bit in the PLC true ON false OFF a value comparison register gt constant or a Boolean expression of up to 70 characters in length Note that when you select the Variable Sized Graphic Template from the tool palette and click on the configuration page the Select Symbol dialog box will appear Select a symbol and click the OK button The symbol you select is only a pl
51. color defined in the Alarm Color field The trend sample will continue to be displayed in the alarm color as other trend samples are being collected as long as Value exceeds the High Alarm Expression value A High Alarm bar is shown in red to the left of the Line Trend Template The High Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Chapter 10 Templates 10 51 Low Alarm Expression Allows you to enter a Low Alarm Expression The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression If Value is less than the Low Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the trend sample will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units the trend sample is displa
52. compared to the results of the Value Expression If Value 1 exceeds the High Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the bar will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units ALARM will appear on the template below the Device Name in medium foreground intensity on blinking high intensity background A High Alarm bar is shown in high intensity to the right of the Value 1 bar e For PanelMate Color units ALARM will appear on the template below the Device Name in white on blinking red A High Alarm bar is shown in red to the right of the Value 1 bar The High Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Low Alarm Allows you to enter a Low Alarm Expression The results of t
53. cursor to select a range of messages Select the first message then drag up or down To select two or more messages select the first message then press the Ctrl key while you select the second message Both messages are selected but messages in between will not be selected Message Allows you to edit an existing message or create a new one As you type the message selected in the Msg Message Destination box is updated To create a new message select an unused message number in the Msg Message Destination box You can type your new message in the Message field To edit or replace a message select a message in the Msg Message Destination box You can then edit the message in the Message field FG Allows you to select the foreground color of the message or messages selected in the Msg Message Destination box Note that you can choose blinking or non blinking colors BG Allows you to select the background color of the message or messages selected in the Msg Message Destination box Note that you can choose blinking or non blinking colors Font Allows you to select a font for the message or messages The selections available are Normal Double High and Quad Note that you should test all message combinations that you expect to use before going online Each line of text is totally independent so be careful when making intensity or color and character size selections Quad or double high character lines can interfere with ea
54. e For PanelMate Color units the template will be displayed with white characters on a blinking red background The High Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical and Boolean expressions may be used including multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Low Alarm Allows you to enter a Low Alarm Expression The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression If Value 1 is less than the Low Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the template will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units the template will be displayed with medium intensity characters on a blinking high intensity background e For PanelMate Color units the template will be displayed with white characters on a blinking red background T
55. e USER CONFIGURATION e EXECUTIVE FIRMWARE e INSTALLED DRIVERS e Name e Version e Date Time e Free Bytes e Used Bytes e Options e Company ID e Model e Product e Network 9 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Online Labels Alarm Text When Alarm Text is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Opto 2 gt Preview Startup Labels Standard z Allow Label Set Switching Label Category to Edit TT User Online Label Standard Online Label Ackd LOW ALARM HIGH ALARM Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Alarm Text is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Clrd e Ackd e LOW ALARM e HIGH ALARM Chapter 9 System Online Labels 9 13 System Online Labels Contrast Adjustment Soft Key Prompts When Contrast Adjustment Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Options __ r Preview Startup Labels Standard i Allow Label Set Switching Ad j ust Contrast Label Category to Edit Contrast Adjus
56. expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Chapter 10 Templates 10 39 Low Alarm Allows you to enter a Low Alarm Expression The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression If Value 1 is less than the Low Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the trend sample will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units the variable sized template is displayed in high intensity The trend sample will continue to be displayed in high intensity as other trend samples are being collected as long as Value 1 is less than the Low Alarm Expression value A Low Alarm bar is shown in high intensity to the left of the Bar Trend Template e For PanelMate Color units the variable sized template is displayed in red The trend sample will continue to be displayed in red as other trend samples are being collected as long as Value l is less than the Low Alarm Expression
57. expression that must be performed on the operator s input before the number is stored in the PLC A question mark inside brackets 7 is used to designate the operator input The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as is enter in the field Refer to the examples below 32 5 9 The operator s input is changed from Fahrenheit to Celsius 2 gt 0 lt 100 lt 0 123 gt 100 123 Target Word Address is 123 This expression limits entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register Any value outside this range has no effect on the value in the register Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information If an expression is defined for an individual entry a small arrow will be displayed in the lower left corner of the template to indicate that numeric entry is available while the template is selected Target Word Address Allows you to define the location of the operator s input in the PLC as the resu
58. four characters the resultant will be displayed is XXX e When the Message Expression is true embedded references are updated on the screen but not sent to the printer Messages configured for BOTH or PRINTER are sent to the printer when the Message Expression changes and also when you change pages e If a hard coded value e g 100 is placed in the Message Expression designated as Global the message will only print once at bootup e A message containing multiple PLC references will print to the screen or printer multiple times once for each reference in the message For more information on register reference formats refer to the General Format Decimal Based Formats Decimal Place Formats Binary Based Formats or Formatting Examples topic 8 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide General Format A message containing multiple PLC references will print to the screen or printer multiple times once for each reference in the message The general format expression is shown below tw d expression where format indicator t type of numeric display I Integer H Hexadecimal B Binary E Exponential D Floating decimal real value O Octal F Fixed decimal real value A ASCII character w Total field width including decimal point negative sign and positive sign Separator between width of format and the number of decimal places used with F or E format d Number of decimal places us
59. gj Input Value Expression Y Yr L J Target Word Address J Units The fields in the Table Template Table Entries Tab dialog box are described below Parameters Value Expression Input Value Expression Target Word Address Displays parameters value expression input value expressions and target word address configured for the Table Template You can configure up to 50 independent display entry fields If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Line 1 of the table corresponds to the first item line 2 corresponds to the second line etc It is not necessary to use all 50 lines When the PanelMate unit goes online the scroll will stop at the last completed entry You may leave blank lines in the table and use lines for display purposes only Parameters Allows you to enter the descriptor for each individual table entry The Parameter field information is saved to disk only if there is a number in the Value Expression Column To save parameter text for test purposes enter a Value Expression of 1 Decimal Places Allows you to determine how the number will be formatted when displayed in the Current Value field and the Edit Value field This field accepts the numbers 0 through 5 Val
60. installation and system debugging and diagnostics Technical support engineers are available for calls during regular business hours 8 am 5 30 pm EST by calling 1 800 809 2772 International calls can be made to either the Tech Line at 1 800 809 2772 toll call or the Cutler Hammer main business line at 614 882 3282 Emergency Technical Support 1 800 809 2772 Because machines do not run on a nine to five schedule we offer emergency after hours technical support A technical support engineer can be paged for emergencies involving plant down situations or safety issues Emergency support calls are automatically routed directly to our answering service after hours 5 30 pm 8 am EST and weekends For emergency technical support call 1 800 809 2772 Note that the Emergency Technical Support phone number does not currently support product repairs or shipping outside normal business hours Technical Support Fax 614 882 0417 You can also contact our technical support engineers by faxing your support requests directly to the Advanced Product Support Center APSC located in Westerville Ohio at 614 882 0417 Information Fax Back Service 614 899 5323 The latest Cutler Hammer product information specifications technical notes and company news is available to you via fax through our direct document request service at 614 899 5323 Using a touch tone phone you can select any of the info faxes from our automated product literature and techni
61. issue a local page change command Refer to the Variable Sized Control Button Template topic for more information 2 46 Configuration Editor User s Guide Database Treeview Window In this chapter you will learn About the Database Treeview Window How to open a New Configuration How to open a New Configuration Page How to set the Configuration Properties How to set the Page Properties Chapter 3 Database Treeview Window 3 1 3 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Database Treeview Window The Database Treeview Window appears on the Main Screen C PMHCONFIGSMODEL Database Configurations f Configurations PanelMate 1500 PanelMate 1700 dE PanelMate 2000 2 Test Configuration rie Configuration Name Configu AB BR jJ Configuration Page Name PanelMate Models ap Symbol Library 2 vee PE System Parameters H PLC Name and Port Table f Message Library i bo 2 System Online Labels PanelMate 3000 PanelMate 4000 BE PanelMate 5000 BE PanelMate PC The Database Treeview Window allows you to create and edit configuration pages and is the main interface used to access the Configuration Software This window displays the database in a tree like structure similar to the Microsoft Windows File Manager To expand and contract the database tree you may double click on the icons or click once on the or symbol next to the icons Note that if an icon does not
62. numeric control a target address and input expression must be entered Failure to include this information will result in a Watchdog Time out error when the template is selected online Password Protection Allows you to lock out access to numeric entry unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit The selections are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswitch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B Password protection must be validated each time the template is selected for numeric entry The template will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit 11 28 Configuration Editor User s Guide Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 29 Variable Sized Display Template Variable Sized Display Templates are designed to replace LED or LCD message units or display readouts They are most effective when used for informational messages e g prompting or diagno
63. selection handle square on the right of the template 11 20 Configuration Editor User s Guide Alarm Device Name Allows you to enter a device name to be used as part of an alarm message The Alarm Device Name field accepts normal sized characters The name used in the Alarm Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 25 characters for the Alarm Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Alarm Device Name field allows you to enter more than 25 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Colors FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the template The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the template The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Font Allows you to choose the font that is used to display the Variable Sized Readout Template on the page The selections are Normal Double High and Quad If redefined fonts are used in a Variable Sized Readout Template the associated Control Arrow may appear in the wrong position during online or runtime operation Direction Allows you to select the orientation in which the readout value is displayed The selections are Horizontal left to right and Vertical top to bottom
64. staat aqsu ee au a sss 11 37 Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphics Attributes Tab 11 38 Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphic States Tab 11 40 Variable Sized Graphic Template Control Definitions Tab 11 42 Vanable Sized Control Button Template spennu um uuu 11 44 Variable Sized Control Button Template VS Control Button Attributes Tab 11 45 Variable Sized Control Button Template Control Definitions Tab 11 47 Chapter PUso aS acct anu ama gh nupuspa ato ca weevebuss tena tealavedisea amu Quim us 12 1 Jae Bie Tero hic aig ek u Sua uD ua uu uy aut ere thaku asa taita ener unre eaten yuyu 12 2 Tas Database hip uuu a ata akaaasuikam as hu denote sendecdeat ie laseud ean taieatanta danas mia eat 12 2 How PanelMate Configuration Software Processes Tag References 12 3 ACCESSES AOS usu umu uma ta E a earn gamed 12 6 Constructing Expressions Using Tags a 12 9 EDS LASS u uu e kupu qasa onion wa ashanka asa eal ic qasan ue Qasa 12 11 Creaung q CSVileir Microsof EXCe ly uu c tua uuu kanuni ua yau 12 12 Creating a CSV File From Your PanelMate Configuration 12 13 Appen
65. tag For your PanelMate application the Configuration software only requires two types of information The Tag Name The PLC I O address reference The Configuration software reads the tag name and I O address information from a comma separated variable csv file Most third party software packages will allow you to create a csv file from your tag database Note The csv file is the only place where tag information can be stored The file can be located anywhere accessible to the PanelMate Configuration software but it can not be edited by the Configuration software It is the user s responsibility to maintain the content of the csv file CSV File Format Parameters 1 The following parameters must be followed when creating the tag name csv file 2 A column ending is delimited by a comma character Ox2c 3 A row is delimited by a lline feed character OxOa and a carriage return character OxOd 4 A row must contain 2 or more columns One of the columns must be the Tag Name and another column must be the PLC I O Address reference 5 Blank rows are permitted A comma after the last column of a row is optional Chapter 12 Using Tags 12 3 How Configuration Software Processes Tag References Tag name information is processed exclusively by the Configuration software When a configuration is exported for downloading to a PanelMate online unit the pps file contains only the I O address information The tag name is not retain
66. template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the l amp J button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 10 Templates 10 49 Line Trend Template Pen Definitions Tab The Line Trend Template Pen Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Line Trend Template E4 Control Definitions Max Cal Hin Cal Value Expression 186 08 8 8008 Fen Color Max Calibration 100 00 Alarm Color m Hin Calibration 0 0000 Value Expression PT High Alarm Expression l Low Alarm Expression PT The fields in the Lme Trend Template Pen
67. that location Control Label Allows you to enter the control button label The Control Label field accepts three lines of normal size alphanumeric characters Use spaces or a carriage return to move the text to the desired location Note that on the configuration page the text displayed in the control button will be truncated but when in Run Mode the text will automatically wrap to the next line If the text wraps to the next line you can eliminate a carriage return in some cases The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference The PLC Bit Reference field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button Expressions or conditional logic cannot be entered If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering
68. the Maintenance Template topic For more information about the Maintenance Template topic refer to the Maintenance Template topic in the Online Operation User s Guide Flexible Page Layout The Flexible Page Layout feature is intended for use on touchscreen units only If a flexible item appears on top of a template or graphic on your configuration page the underlying template or graphic will be deleted when the configuration is exported Page Status Banner Allows you to determine if the Page Status Banner will appear on the screen of your touchscreen unit Note that if you do not want the Page Status Banner to appear you must select the Flexible Page Layout field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box and de select the Page Status Banner box Default Buttons Allows you to determine if the default buttons will appear on the screen of your touchscreen unit Note that if you do not want the Default Buttons to appear you must select the Flexible Page Layout field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box and de select the Default Buttons box Alarm Table Allows you to determine if alarms will appear on the screen of your touchscreen unit Note that if you do not want alarms to appear you must select the Flexible Page Layout field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box and de select the Alarms Table box Cancel Key Allows you to determine if the CANCEL key will appear on the screen of your touchscreen unit
69. the Make Symbol topic When symbols have been created in the configuration and you click on a symbol name under the Symbol Library selection in the Database Treeview Window the Symbol Library dialog box will appear Symbol Library Symbol Name Symbol Origin Offset a YT Preview X Show Preview F The Symbol Library dialog box allows you to view all symbol names that have been created for your configuration The fields in the Symbol Library dialog box are described below Symbol Name Displays the name of the symbol you selected Note that you may scroll through the symbol name list and preview each symbol if the Show Preview box is selected Symbol Origin Offset Displays the symbol s origin offset in pixels The default Symbol Origin Offset for X and Y is 0 and 0 no offset X Displays the X origin offset in pixels Y Displays the Y origin offset in pixels Preview Displays the selected symbol in the Preview box if the Show Preview box is selected Show Preview Allows the selected symbol to be shown in the Preview box If the Symbol Library Preview Window is not displaying the selected symbol simply open any configuration page and the functionality will be restored You may double click on a symbol on a configuration page to view the Symbol Properties dialog box Refer to the Symbol Properties topic for more information The objects that make up a symbol cannot be edited If you wish to change
70. the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 11 44 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Control Button Template The Variable Sized Control Button is a one touch button you can place anywhere a template or element can be placed The Direct Select Touchscreen Only feature is intended for use on PanelMate touchscreen units and PanelMate NT units only This template is intended for use with touchscreen units and should be used with the Direct Select feature in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box If the Direct Select feature is not enabled or if you use the Variable Sized Control Button Template on a touchpanel unit it becomes a two step select and execute button The Variable Sized Control Button Template is used to provide a momentary control to the PLC e g start and stop machinery or to issue a local page change command SS Ax CAUTION When placing a Variable Sized Control Button on a page to issue a page change command make sure there is not a Variable Sized Control Button occupying the same location on the destination page If multiple touches are attempted on the Variable Sized Control Button all touches after the first will be applied to the destination page This will cause the Variable Sized Control Button on the destination page to be executed thus possibly resulting in unintended machinery operation or unintended page changes When using the Variable Sized Con
71. the Tag Name File dialog box are described below Tag Name File Allows you to enter the path and name of the tag name csv file The Open button is available to assist you in locating your csv file Open Allows you to browse and select the path for the Tag Name file When the Open button is pressed the Open Existing Tag Name File dialog box will appear Open Existing Tag Name File 2 File name Folders OK c pmconfig Cancel l gt PMCONFIG SORTER CSV SORTER2 CSV C3 CONVRTDB He MODEL C3 MODELOOO NTFONTS g O List files of type Drives csv Files cs jid Tag Name Column Allows you to select the column number of the csv file that contains the Tag Name Reference Column Allows you to select the column number of the csv file that contains the PLC I O address reference 7 18 Configuration Editor User s Guide Note When using a Cutler Hammer NetSolver Tag Name file select the same column for both the Tag Name Column and the Reference Column Select Tag Start Row Allows you to select the beginning row of the tag data Since most csv files contain some header information it is necessary to identify the first row of actual tag data Edit If you wish to modify add or delete any tag information in you csv file wyou will need to use another Windows application such as Notepad or Excel The Edit button combined with your selection of either the Notepad or Excel radio buttons will l
72. the address 3 contains the value 0 1 gt 2 5 gt 6 false 0 l 2 3 lt 6 tue I 1 ll 2 5 Il 6 true Il true true 1 2 amp amp 3 6 amp amp 0 true amp amp false false 0 Note that lt gt gt and lt work similarly Exponential Function Examples Assume that the address 1 contains the value 5 and the address 2 contains the value 6 1 2 5 6 5 raised to the 6 power 1 exp 2 5 exp 6 5 times 10 raised to the 6 power Appendix B Communication Driver Help Files B 1 Communication Driver Help Files In this chapter you will learn e About the Communication Driver Help Files B 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Communication Driver Help Files Cutler Hammer provides an online help file for some of the PLC models that can communicate to a PanelMate unit These PLC help files provide detailed information about the configuration of your PLC Refer to the PLC driver list in the Configuration Editor help file Note that if you click on a PLC driver help file in the list below and the PLC driver help does not appear either the PLC driver and the associated help file was not installed or the PLC driver help file has been deleted For help on PLCs not listed see the appropriate Communication Driver Manual Appendix C Word and Bit References C 1 Word and Bit References In this chapter you will learn e About the Word and Bit Refer
73. these boxes Expressions may not be entered If these boxes are left blank the features will be disabled Password A Allows you to set a bit in the PLC when the operator enters valid passwords during Run Mode The bit is set when the password is logged in on the Setup Page during Run Mode Password B Allows you to set a bit in the PLC when the operator enters valid passwords during Run Mode The bit is set when the password is logged in on the Setup Page during Run Mode Hardware Selection Allows you to set a bit in the PLC when an external keyswitch is turned on during Run Mode The bit is set when the hardware contact is closed and the keyswitch is closed on Chapter 6 System Parameters 6 13 Reset Clock To 00 00 00 Bit Allows you to scan a bit in the PLC and reset the PanelMate unit s system clock when the bit is set The clock will reset each time you change to a page that has the reset clock bit set to 1 Note that only bit references are allowed in these boxes Expressions may not be entered If these boxes are left blank the features will be disabled The date is changed to the day closest to the current time The following examples show how the date is affected by the clock synchronization bit Time Date Before Reset Time Date After Reset 23 30 10 December 10 1997 00 00 00 December 11 1997 00 30 10 December 13 1997 00 00 00 December 13 1997 12 00 00 December 24 1997 00 00 00 December 25 1997 11 59 59 December
74. value A Low Alarm bar is shown in red to the left of the Bar Trend Template The Low Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Max Calibration Allows you to determine the highest point of the line trend This value displays on the template This six character text box accepts 6 digits or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the field Min Calibration Allows you to determine the lowest point of the line trend This value displays on the template This six character text box accepts 6 digits or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the field Deadband Range Allows you to enter a number between 0 99 that will represent the percentage of the high alarm value minus the low alarm value that defines the width of the de
75. value that defines the width of the deadband The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value that must be crossed before Value is considered to have returned to normal status go out of alarm The deadband range prevents multiple alarm messages from being generated when Value is hovering around an alarm threshold Alarm Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is selected the operator must acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm message will be automatically removed from the list when the alarm condition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured 11 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab The Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below YVarnable Sized Bar Template Fa WS Bar Attributes Control Type Hone The fields in the Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Type Allows you to define the control type used for the template The selections are described below None Allows the template to show a value that the operator cannot control Buttons Requires th
76. was defined as three characters in length but the value to be displayed was four characters XXX would be displayed for the value Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information High Alarm Allows you to enter a High Alarm Expression The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression If Value exceeds the High Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list e For PanelMate Grayscale units the variable sized template is displayed with medium intensity characters on a blinking high intensity background e For PanelMate Color units the variable sized template is displayed with white characters on a blinking red background 11 22 Configuration Editor User s Guide The High Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the LI button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags R
77. 1 Bar Template Tool 2 44 Bar Trend Template 10 33 Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Tab 10 34 Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab 10 40 Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control 10 41 Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control 10 43 Bar Trend Template Expressions Tab 10 37 Bar Trend Template Tool 2 44 Bit References 11 51 C5 Bitmap Tool 2 43 Bulletin Board Service III C Clock and Calendar References within Messages 8 11 Color Display Feature 1 3 Color Selection Palette 2 37 Communication Driver Help Files B 2 Conditional Expression Examples A 3 Bit wise Function Examples A 4 Exponential Function Examples A 4 General Examples A 3 Logical Function Examples A 4 Trigonometry Function Examples A 3 Conditional Expression Operators A 2 Configuration Editor Problems F 2 Index l 1 Configuration Editor Report Options 2 20 Configuration Editor Reports 2 19 Configuration Properties 3 8 Conversion 2 9 Correspondence Address III CSV File Creating 12 12 Customer Support Center III D Danish1 Font 4 6 Database Treeview Window 3 2 DCSNeT Interface Drop 7 14 DDE Client and Server Communications 7 21 DDE Setup 7 5 DeviceNet Setup 7 15 DH 485 Maximum Node Address 7 9 Display Template 10 54 Display Template Control Definitions Tab 10 59 Display Template Display Attributes Tab 10 55 Display Template
78. 100 make up a PanelMate database Other PanelMate databases can be accessed from the Open Database dialog box by selecting the drive and folder in which a valid PanelMate database resides A single file from the database pmconfig db indicates that the folder contains a viable database Once a folder is selected which has a valid database and the OK button is clicked the Configuration Editor will open the database display the Database Treeview Window and allow you to create or edit a configuration If you install new configuration software that has an upgraded database and attempt to open an earlier version of the database the Upgrade Database dialog box will appear Note that not every new configuration software version will have an upgraded database The Upgrade Database dialog box allows you to upgrade any earlier version of the database to be compatible with the new configuration software For more information on upgrading the database refer to the Upgrade Database topic See the Configuration Editor Problems topic if problems are encountered when attempting to open a database 2 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide Upgrade Database If you install new configuration software that has an upgraded database and attempt to open an older version of the database the Upgrade Database dialog box will appear Note that not every new configuration software version will have an upgraded database Upgrade Database Ea Databaze to upgra
79. 2 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Tag Usage Overview Tags are used as a convenient method of referencing the I O address in a PLC reference A tag name can be directly associated with a specific PLC I O address ie GATE OPEN B450 104 There are several advantages for using tags in your PanelMate configuration e After defining a tag the tag can be reused anywhere in your PanelMate configuration Instead of retyping the I O address you simply type in the tag name or select it from a pull down list or dialog box e You can quickly change multiple identical I O addresses in your configuration by just editing the PLC address associated with the tag e You can reuse tags in other PanelMate configurations After you have developed a tag database you can reuse the database in future PanelMate configurations e You can adapt tag databases developed for other applications products ie your PLC for use with your PanelMate application without defining the relationship between tags and addresses twice e You can reduce development time and typing errors by selecting tags from pull down lists and dialog boxes instead of typing them Tag Database Files Tags are stored in a tag database There are many third party software packages that can be used for creating and editing tag databases including Microsoft Excel Depending on the intended application for the tag database the database may contain a variety of data related to each
80. 4501 27 54547149 B45407116 B45071402 B45407104 SORT POS 3 6450 106 Sort List Hy Tag Name C Reference Used Tag 1 BELT RUN Updat 2 B45a 124 3 Page 5 216 248 Indicator Condit tone ki ARMA WAGGA j H a H I H bo y gt yy Shaft ririhi Tag Exp Ref Exp Error Edit expression the reference expression and parser error will be displayed under The fields in the Expression Edit dialog box are described below 12 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide Devices Field Displays the device associated with the tag csv file Tag Name and Reference Field Tags From Tag Name File Tab The upper field displays the Tag Name and Reference The lower field displays the Tag Name and Reference column information Double clicking on a Tag Name and Reference in the upper field and pressing the OK button will select the tag and close the Expression Edit dialog box Tag Name and Reference Field Tag Cross Reference Tab The upper field displays the Tag Name and References used in the configuration When a Tag Name Reference is highlighted the lower field displays the specific where used information Sort List By Determines the order of information displayed in the Tag Name and Reference field Tag Exp This field displays the tag names and operators used in the Tag Expression For more information refer to Constructing Expressions Using Tags Ref Exp This fiel
81. 5 5 2 u noraso a N A Seaaduataencaraucenents 7 13 Device NCU Slip yu a cinta aie ata en eae ee 7 14 Ta ha item TI Xun yuuuk kam pt pss att sn na patapata kayu tapa Zaa 7 16 Table of Contents lil Chapter S Messaselipary a u i u usss 8 1 INIESSASS T Di i ou uyanan kasaekpu kutuesuqayma usuta um Sanco akwa Coasts Ahasiea ts 8 2 Register References within MeSSaeesuuu su u u a u e u aska ian qasuy 8 5 Chapter 9 System Online lapelu uy k usu u l u D was puis as 9 1 SYS eni OM MMe AD els uu yuyu uu umu my a 9 2 System Online Labels Miscellaneous Soft Key Prompts 9 4 System Online Labels Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompts 9 6 System Online Labels User Entry Soft Key Prompts 9 7 System Onine Labels Setup Pate zs tiis uy a u m Sua u tuia S 9 8 System Online Labels Brror M essapesSu ul u u Ae eae 9 9 system Online Labels Miscellaneous Text uu 2 2 unu n usu Su SD uuu usss 9 10 System Online Labels Display System Configuration Info 9 11 System Online Labels Alila u m m Sa s 9 12 System Online Labels Contrast Adjustment Soft Key Prompts System Online Labels Touchscreen Button Templates System Online Labels To
82. 52 ALT 0160 ALT 0169 ALT 0176 1 ALT 0104 A ALT 0192 E ALT 0200 D ALT U2UB ALT 0216 a ALT 0224 ALT 0232 AL T 2 d0 ALT 0248 D ALT 0129 a ALT O137 ALT 0145 TI ALT 0153 ALT 0161 ALT 0169 ALT O01 77 ALT 0185 A ALT 0143 E ALT 0201 ALT 0209 ALT 0217 ALT 0225 ALT 0233 ALT 0741 Li ALT 0249 ALT 0130 S ALT 0138 ALT 0146 ALT 0154 ALT 0162 L ALT 0170 z AlL T 1 78 ALT 017866 ma A ALT 0194 E ALT 0202 ALT 0210 UI ALT 0218 ALT 0226 ALT 0234 AlL T d Li ALT 02560 ALT 0141 i ALT 0139 ALT O14f ALT 0155 L da ALT 0163 ALT 0171 3 ALT 0179 a gt ALT O0107 A ALT 01495 E ALT 0203 ALT U211 U ALT 0219 a ALT 022 2 ALT 0235 AL T 243 ALT 0251 ALT 0132 E ALT 0140 ALT tO14 Le ALT 0156 i ALT 0164 ALT O01 72 ALT 0100 x ALT 01808 A ALT 0196 ALT 0704 ALT tO212 ALT 0220 a ALT 02726 ALT 0236 ALT4 024d4 LI ALT 025 2 ALT 0143 O ALT 0141 ALT 0149 l ALT OU1S7 lt ALT 0165 ALT 0173 l ALT 01861 1 ALT 01849 A ALT 0197 ALT 0205 ALT 0213 7 ALT 0221 ALT 0229 ALT 0237 ALT 024a5 ALT 0253 Chapter 4 Font Editor ALT 0134 l ALT 01 42 ALT 0150 l ALT 0158
83. 80 etc that have more than seven racks must use the PLC 3 model selection to address racks above seven 4 Click the Remote I O button and the Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup dialog box will appear The Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup dialog box is shown below Allen Bradley Remote 1 O Setup PLC Model PLCS 15 Active Rack Table ee Block Transfer Addressing Rack 1 2 3 4 Qtr 1 None Type Octal x Otr 2 None Qtr 3 Mone Qtr 4 None Active Block Transfer T able Transfer Direction Rack Group Slot Direction None Rack 1 El Group 0 e Sit o E m E Ei Tr Z ri m l eh ek k ek ee ee un D eB be s o The Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup dialog box is used to configure the PanelMate unit for remote I O communication The fields in the Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup dialog box are described below PLC Model Displays the PLC model selected in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 11 Active Rack Allows you to define which racks are to be simulated by the PanelMate unit on the network Rack Size Selects the quarter racks Each full rack can be split into a quarter rack or any multiple of a quarter racks 1 e 1 4 1 2 3 4 or full rack A blank entry shows the rack is inactive A status of 4 1 2 3 4 or F shows the rack to be active and indicates the starting quarter for a fractional rack A dash i
84. ALT 0162 ALT 0170 ALT 0178 ALT 0186 ALT 0194 ALT 0202 ALT 0210 ALT 0216 ALT 0226 ALT 0734 ALT 024 ALT 0250 ALT 0131 ALT 0139 ALT 0147 ALT 0155 ALT Q0163 ALT 0171 ALT 0179 ALT O187 ALT 0195 ALT 0203 ALT 0211 ALT 0219 ALT 022F ALT 0235 ALT 0243 ALT 0251 ALT 0132 ALT 0140 ALT 0148 ALT 0156 ALT 0164 ALT 0172 ALT 0180 ALT O188 ALT 0196 ALT 02704 ALT 0212 ALT 0220 ALT 0228 ALT 0736 ALT 0744 ALT 0252 ALT 0133 ALT 0141 ALT 0149 ALT 0157 ALT 0165 ALT 0173 ALT 0181 ALT 0189 ALT O0197 ALT 0205 ALT 0213 ALT 0221 ALT 0229 ALT 0237 ALT 0245 ALT 0253 Chapter 4 Font Editor ALT 0134 ALT 0142 ALT 0150 ALT 0158 ALT 0166 ALT 0174 ALT 018 ALT 0190 ALT 0198 ALT 0206 ALT 0214 ALT 0 222 ALT 0230 ALT40738 ALT 0246 ALT 0254 ALT 0127 ALT 0135 ALT 0143 ALT 0151 ALT 0159 ALT 0167 ALT 0175 ALT 0183 ALT 0191 ALT 0199 ALT 0207 ALT 0215 ALT 0 223 ALT 0231 ALT 02739 ALT 0247 ALT 0255 4 19 4 20 Configuration Editor User s Guide Chapter 5 Symbol Library 5 1 Symbol Library In this chapter you will learn e About the Symbol Library e About the Symbol Properties e About the Symbol Origin 5 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Symbol Library For information on creating symbols refer to
85. ALT U734 ALT 024 7 ALT 0250 f ALT 0131 lt ALT 013 9 ALT 0147 ALT 0155 r ALT 0153 x ALT401 1 ALT 0179 gt gt ALT O187 A ALT 0195 ALT 0203 ALT 0211 U ALT 0219 all a ALT 0227 5 ALT 027356 ALT 02743 ALT 02751 ALT 0132 if ALT 0140 ALT 0146 te ALT 0156 ri ALT 0164 4 ALT 0172 ALT 0180 K ALT 0188 A ALT 0196 I ALT 0204 T ALT 0212 i ALT 0220 E ALT 0228 i ALT102736 ALT 0744 T ALT 0257 ALT 0133 T ALT 0141 ALT 0149 T ALT 0157 ALT Q0165 ALT 0173 Lt ALT 0131 K ALT 0189 A ALT 0197 1 ALT 0205 ALT 0213 7 ALT 0271 ALT 0229 1 ALT102737 ALT 0245 ALT 0253 t ALT 0134 T ALT 0142 ALT 0150 T ALT 0158 ALT Q0166 ALT4 0174 T ALT 018 4 ALT 0190 ALT 0198 1 ALT 0206 i ALT 0214 P ALT 0222 Ee ALT 0230 i ALT402738 ALT 0246 P ALT 0254 Chapter 4 Font Editor W D ALT 0127 ALT 0135 T ALT 0143 ALT 0151 T ALT 0159 ALT 0167 ALT 0175 ALT 0183 ALT 0191 K ALT 0199 i ALT 0 07 a ALT 0215 ALT 0223 ALT 0231 1 ALT 0239 ALT 0247 ALT 0255 4 5 4 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide Danish1 Font To enter the following characters press the recall key s Refer to the examples below Examples To enter the character AE press the recall keys
86. Appendix C Word and Bit References C 3 The PanelMate unit recognizes the following formats Signed 16 bit integer between 32768 and 32767 inclusive The sign is defined by the high order bit Unsigned 16 bit integer between 0 and 65535 inclusive Signed 32 bit integer between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 inclusive The sign is defined by the high order bit Unsigned 32 bit integer between 0 and 4 294 967 295 inclusive Three digit binary coded decimal number between 0 and 999 Four digit binary coded decimal number between 0 and 9 999 Six digit binary coded decimal number between 0 and 999 999 The number is stored in two contiguous registers three digits per register Eight digit binary coded decimal number between 0 and 99 999 999 The number is stored in two contiguous registers four digits per register Three digit decimal number between 0 and 999 Four digit decimal number between 0 and 9 999 Six digit decimal number between 0 and 999 999 The number is stored in two contiguous registers three digits per register Eight digit decimal number between 0 and 99 999 999 The number is stored in two contiguous registers four digits per register When specifying these data formats the address specified for word defines the first of the two registers the one with the lower reference This register will contain the most significant portion of the number C 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide FP 32 bi
87. BIN formats do not support negative values Expressions can be used to scale values in the PanelMate unit so the operator enters and reads negative numbers but positive numbers are written to or read from the PLC Appendix C Word and Bit References C 5 PLC Bit References All of the editors use the same format for referencing PLC bits To refer to a specific bit in any expression use the following format plcname bit The field plcname is optional If no information is entered in this field default values are used PLC Bit Format Fields plcname The six character or less name of the designated PLC followed by a comma The PLC name is defined in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box See the PLC Name and Port Table topic for more information about this name If plcname is omitted the default PLC defined in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box is used This field is optional bit The actual PLC reference number of the bit to be read or written using the addressing nomenclature of the PLC defined by plcname See the specific PLC section for more information about word reference numbers C 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide Appendix D Using Graphics from other Software D 1 Using Graphics from other Software In this chapter you will learn e About using graphics from other software D 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Using Graphics from other Software You can cut and copy graphics
88. Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control The Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control is shown below Bar Template E4 Bar Athribubes Control Definitions Control Label PLC Bit Reference Ts Control Label oo PLC Bit Fa Reference pO Bu Control Type eae EG The Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control defines the control buttons on your PanelMate unit If a control button is defined a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a control button is pressed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to 0 thus providing a momentary input to the PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic The fields in the Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control button labels and the associated PLC Bit Reference Line corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all control buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at that location Control Label Allows you to enter the control button label The Control Label field accepts th
89. C to be addressed You use this name when specifying word and bit addresses that will display unsolicited data only References specified with an Unsolicited Device Name will not be polled by the PanelMate unit and will only be updated by an unsolicited write from the PLC Note that unsolicited references are initialized as zeroes Model Allows you to define the model type of each PLC that supports unsolicited writes The PLC model type in the MSG instruction configured in the PLC ladder logic must match the PLC type in the Unsolicited Model field For more information about unsolicited data refer to the Allen Bradley Communication Driver Manual or the Modicon Communication Driver Manual 7 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide Generic Protocol To configure the Generic Protocol dialog box the following steps must be completed 1 A port must be selected and Generic must be selected in the Device Use field in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box 2 Click the Generic button and the Generic Protocol dialog box will appear The Generic Protocol dialog box is shown below Generic Protocol Fa PORT 2 Hame PLET IDH included Type Octal Ral BCC Bit included The Generic Protocol dialog box is used to configure serial ports that use the Generic Protocol for communication The fields in the Generic Protocol dialog box are described below PORT Displays the port selected in the Port Device Use Local
90. Description Displays the description entered when the configuration was created in the New Configuration dialog box You can edit the description as required Chapter 3 Database Treeview Window 3 9 Product Features The following Product Features can also be selected in the New Configuration dialog box Color Display Allows you to select a color configuration If this box is not checked the configuration will be grayscale High Capacity Unit Allows you to create a larger number of pages and messages than permitted in the Standard Capacity environment Refer to the table below for feature limits Maximum Maximum Number of Number of Product Type Pages Messages PanelMate Power Series 1500 50 2500 All other PanelMate Power Series models 100 5000 PanelMate PC 100 10000 Note that the complexity of the configuration may reduce the number of pages and messages in the PanelMate unit Advanced Trending Template Allows you to configure Advanced Trending Templates which display a history of a reference s value over a period of time Advanced trending features 6 pens that can be triggered by time or event For information on configuring an Advanced Trending Template refer to the Line Trend Template topic Allen Bradley DH 485 Allows you to communicate to the Allen Bradley Data Highway Modicon Modbus Allows you to communicate to Modicon PLCs via the Modicon Modbus or the Modicon Modbus Plus Dynamic Graphics Allows symbols to ch
91. Directores gt pps c pmcontigsonline clg T gt PMCONFIG ONLINE m rra List Files of Type Drives PanelMate Power Series c CHS r The Import dialog box allows you to import a configuration file into the database Note that earlier PanelMate Power Series configuration files and PanelMate Series V2 1 X configuration files may also be imported PanelMate Series V2 1 X configuration files will have one of the following extensions PanelMate Series 2000 Grayscale PC1 or PC2 PanelMate Series 2000 Color PC5 or PC6 PanelMate Series 3000 Grayscale PC1 or PC2 PanelMate Series 3000 Color PC5 or PC6 PanelMate Series 4000 PC3 or PC4 Tip Once the configuration file is imported it can be exported to a current configuration file to an earlier PanelMate Power Series configuration file or to a PanelMate Series V2 1X configuration file Refer to the Export and Export As topics for more information on exporting configurations The Import selection and Export selection in the File Menu may be used to copy configurations from one personal computer to another After export a configuration PPS file can be copied to another computer and imported into another PanelMate database When using this method to copy configurations please note the following issues e Test message numbers in Display Templates and Variable Sized Display Templates are not exported Therefore all test message numbers in an imported configurat
92. E Online Options __ Preview Startup Labels Standard i Allow Label Set Switching Ch Password A Label Category to Edit ce User Online Label Standard Online Label Change Paseword A Change Password B Log in Password A Log in Password B Log out Password A Log out Password B Set Date and Time Enter Offline Mode Graphic Password A Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Setup Page is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Change Password A e Change Password B e Log in Password A e Log in Password B e Log out Password A e Log out Password B e Set Date and Time e Enter Offline Mode e Display System Config Information e Switch to Two Column Keypad e Switch to Three Column Keypad Chapter 9 System Online Labels 9 9 System Online Labels Error Messages When Error Messages is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear Online Options Startup Labels Standard i Hardware Allow Label Set Switching Selection Label Category to Edit ee User Online Label Standard Online Label Hardware Select ion Disabled Chan Invalid Entry Press An
93. Expression field will be displayed Change Allows you to sample a trend value when the Value 1 Expression trend value changes If the Change trigger type is selected the Interval Expression field and the Discrete Expression field will not be displayed If the Bar Trend Template has the Change trigger type configured and the source data is floating point instead of integer the data in the template will only update when the value prior to the decimal point changes When trending floating point values it is better to use either the Interval or Discrete trigger types Interval Expression Appears only when the Interval trigger type is selected The Interval Expression field allows you to enter an expression that will determine the trend value sample rate The result of the Interval Expression multiplied by the Trend Scan Delay set in the System Parameters Remote Tab dialog box determines the trend value sample rate The sample rate can range from 1 to 2 147 483 seconds For example if the Trend Scan Delay is configured for 2 seconds and the Interval Expression evaluates to 5 the trend will be updated every 10 seconds If the resulting sample rate is 0 the data collection for the trend template will be disabled If the Trend Scan Delay is 0 it is assumed as 1 second when calculating the sample rate Note that if an interval is selected that is too rapid for the PanelMate unit or PLC to keep up with the request a blank bar will appear wher
94. Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Template Size In Cells Height Allows you to enter the height of the Bar Trend Template as 1 2 or 3 Width Allows you to enter the width of the Bar Trend Template as 2 or 3 The width of the Bar Trend Template determines the number of trend samples that can be displayed at one time e A 2 wide template can display 16 trend samples e A 3 wide template can display 29 trend samples Chapter 10 Templates 10 35 Trigger Type Allows you to select the trigger type for the trending The selections are described below Interval Allows you to sample a trend value when a time period has elapsed The Interval in conjunction with the Trend Scan Delay designates the time interval between trend samples The Trend Scan Delay is configured in the System Parameters Communications Tab dialog box The following equation is used to calculate the time interval between trend samples Trend Scan Delay x Interval Sample Rate For example if the Trend Scan Delay is 2 seconds and the Interval is 3 the sample rate will be 6 seconds If the Interval trigger type is selected the Interval Expression field will be displayed Discrete Allows you to sample a trend value when an external value e g a bit reference in the PLC changes resulting in the Interval Expression value changing from false to true If the Discrete trigger type is selected the Discrete
95. Height Allows you to enter the height of the Table Template as 1 2 or 3 The height of the Table Template determines the number of table entries that can be displayed at one time e A 1 high template can display 2 table entries e A 2 high template can display 9 table entries e A 3 high template can display 16 table entries Width Allows you to enter the width of the Table Template as 2 or 3 Parameters Tag Allows you to enter a title for the Parameters column in the Table Template The Parameters Tag field accepts 12 normal sized characters in a 2 wide template and accepts 18 normal sized characters in a 3 wide template Edit Value Tag Allows you to enter a title for the Edit Values column in the Table Template The Edit Value field is enabled only when a 3 Wide template is being configured The field accepts up to 6 normal sized characters These values are the operator s input The Edit Value Tag field values remain until the Table Template is re selected or when the page is first displayed Refer to the Input Value Expression field in the Table Template Table Entries Tab topic for more information 10 30 Configuration Editor User s Guide Current Value Tag Allows you to enter a title for the Current Values column in the Table Template The Current Value Tag field accepts up to 7 normal sized characters Refer to the Value Expression field in the Table Template Table Entries Tab topic for more information Units Tag Allows yo
96. ID If a PanelMate PC configuration has a serial communications driver assigned to a serial port which is not available within Windows NT an error message will appear when you run the configuration To troubleshoot the possible conflicts check the Ports configuration and Devices configuration in the Control Panel or check the Windows NT Diagnostics in the Administrative Tools Common Device Use Displays the device assigned to the port You can select various PLC drivers Serial Printer or No Usage from the Device Use box The selection chosen in the Device Use box will appear in the Port Device Use Local ID box Different device drivers will appear in the list for the Device Use box depending on the port you have selected in the Port Device Use Local ID box Note that only device drivers that have been installed from the driver disks will appear Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 3 Local ID Assigns a number to the PanelMate unit on a PLC network See the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for PLC dependent local ID information Do not use the same number for the Local ID and the remote ID lt Port Settings gt Displays the Port Settings dialog box The Port Settings dialog box is used to select the communication parameters for the selected port Refer to the Port Settings topic for more information lt Unsolicited Device gt Displays the Unsolicited Device dialog box The Unsolicited Device dialog box is used to assign a
97. Mate unit PASS THROUGH indicates that the block transfer is reserved for the pass through feature The PASS THROUGH selection can only configured for one block transfer All of the selections describe communication from the PLC s point of view Rack Defines the rack being used by the block transfer The available selections are determined by the Active Rack Table Group Defines the group number within the quarter rack being used by the block transfer The selections available are 0 through 7 Slot Defines the slot number within the group being used by the block transfer The available selections are 0 and 1 Size Defines the size in 16 bit words of the block transfer The available selections are decimal numbers from 1 to 64 If the Direction is selected as PASS THROUGH the size is fixed at 64 For more information about Remote I O refer to the Allen Bradley Communication Driver Manual 7 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide Active Rack Example The example below shows a PanelMate unit simulating a full rack on rack 0 3 4 of rack 1 beginning with quarter 2 and 1 2 of rack 2 beginning with quarter 1 Allen Bradley Remote 1 0 Setup Octal A L L B 1 1 C 1 1 D 1 1 E 1 1 F 1 1 G 1 1 H 1 1 l 1 1 J 1 1 K 1 1 Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 13 GE Fanuc Genius I O To configure the GE Fanuc Genius I O dialog box the following steps must be completed 1 The I O port must be selected and Geni
98. Note that if you do not want the CANCEL key to appear you must select the Flexible Page Layout field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box and de select the Cancel Key box 3 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide Configuration Properties When a configuration name is selected in the Database Treeview Window and the Properties button is clicked the Configuration Properties dialog box will appear Configuration Properties Product Type PanelMate 2000 Version AAA Configuration Name Last Modified Time m Test Configuration On Last Modified Date Description Product Option __ r Auto Centering Color Display Allen Bradley DH 485 Device Names High Capacity Unit Modicon Modbus Indicator Labels Advanced Trending Template Control Button Labels The Configuration Properties dialog box displays configuration product features and auto centering information The fields in the Configuration Properties dialog box are described below Product Type Displays the product type Version Displays the configuration software version number Configuration Name Displays the name assigned when the configuration was created in the New Configuration dialog box You may change this name to save the configuration under a new name Last Modified Time Displays the time of the last modification to the configuration Last Modified Date Displays the date of the last modification to the configuration
99. PanelMate Configuration Editor dialog box will appear About PanelMate Configuration Editor E4 PanelMate Configuration Editor Version AAA Copyright 1995 1997 Cutler Hammer Inc Available Memory 277233 KH Free Hath Co processor Present Disk Space 336256 KH Free The information in the About PanelMate Configuration Editor dialog box is listed below e Name of the Configuration Editor version number and copyright information e Amount of free memory e Presence of math co processor e Amount of free disk space 2 35 2 36 Configuration Editor User s Guide Toolbar When the Toolbar selection is checked under the View Menu the Toolbar will appear on the Main Screen JEJEJE Norma a Sali You can use the Toolbar buttons to perform many of Configuration Editor s standard operations The Toolbar buttons are described below Save Saves the current configuration to disk Print Prints a hard copy of the current configuration Cut Removes the selected object from the configuration and places it on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of the selected object on the Windows clipboard but does not remove it from the configuration Paste Pastes the contents of the Windows clipboard into the current configuration oa oponas Undo Un does the previous operation Redo Re does the operation previously un done Bring To Front Brings a selected object to the front top of a stack of objects
100. Remote Tab dialog box determines the trend value sample rate The sample rate can range from 1 to 2 147 483 seconds For example if the Trend Scan Delay is configured for 2 seconds and the Interval Expression evaluates to 5 the trend will be updated every 10 seconds If the resulting sample rate is 0 the data collection for the trend template will be disabled If the Trend Scan Delay is 0 it is assumed as 1 second when calculating the sample rate Note that if an interval is selected that is too rapid for the PanelMate unit or PLC to keep up with the request a blank space will appear where any interval has been missed Low sample values might also cause a blank space to appear To distinguish as low sample value from a missed interval configure the minimum calibration lower than the lowest expected minimum value e For PanelMate Grayscale units Interval is the value that displays as a medium intensity horizontal bar to the right of the Value 1 bar e For PanelMate Color units Interval is the value that displays as a blue horizontal bar to the right of the Value 1 bar Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by enteri
101. T 0220 ALT10226 ALT 0236 Al T 2 dA LI ALT 252 ALT 0143 0 ALT 0141 ALT 0149 l ALT O15F lt ALT 0165 ALT 173 ll ALT 0161 1 ALT 01849 A ALT 0147 ALT 0205 i ALT 0213 T ALT 221 ALT 0229 ALT 0237 ALT O02d5 LI ALT 0253 V ALT 0134 l ALT O14 ALT 0150 U ALT 015 amp ALT 0166 ALT 174 T ALT 0102 En ALT 0190 a ALT 01498 ALT 0706 ALT 0214 P ALT 222 ALT 0230 ALT 0238 ALT 0246 h ALT 0254 Chapter 4 Font Editor Ww ALT 127 i ALT 0135 0 ALT 0143 ALT 0151 Y ALT 015 8 ALT O0167 ALT 0175 ALT 0104 ALT 01491 ALT 0199 ALT 02707 ALT 0215 B ALT 223 ALT 0231 4 ALT 0239 ALT 0247 st ALT 0255 4 7 4 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide French1 Font To enter the following characters press the recall key s Refer to the examples below Examples To enter the character press the recall keys To enter the character C press the recall key C To enter the character press the recall keys ALT 0174 r 1 L d M I 1 A B C D E F G r A j g b x H J K L M N O Fi i i Y 5 P Q R S T U V W i X Y z A OD r of amp i 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 8 9 lt gt gt A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R
102. T 0226 ALT1 0734 ALT 7247 ALT 0750 f ALT 0131 z ALT 0139 ALT 0147 gt ALT 0155 r ALT Q0163 lt ALT40171 ALT 0179 ALT 0187 ALT 0195 ALT 0203 0 ALT 0211 U ALT 0219 a ALT 227 E ALT 0235 ALT 7243 ALT 0751 ALT 0132 if ALT 0140 ALT 0148 te ALT 0156 m ALT 0164 _ ALT 01 2 ALT 0180 k ALT 0188 A ALT 0196 I ALT 0204 T ALT 0212 l ALT 0220 E ALT 0228 i ALT410736 ALT 0744 T ALT 02757 ALT 0133 T ALT 0141 ALT 0149 T ALT 0157 sz ALT 0165 ALT 0173 Ll ALT 0131 rh ALT 0189 A ALT 0197 ALT 0205 ALT 0213 i ALT 0221 ALT 9229 i ALT102737 J ALT 0245 4 ALT 0253 Chapter 4 Font Editor t ALT 0134 T ALT 0142 ALT 0150 T ALT 0156 ALT 0166 iB ALT 101T74 T ALT 018 4 ALT 0190 ALT 0198 ALT 0206 7 ALT 0214 P ALT 0222 ALT 0230 i ALT 0738 ALT 0746 P ALT 0254 w D ALT 0127 n ALT 0135 T ALT 0143 ALT 0151 ALT 0159 LT 157 ALT 0175 ALT 0183 i ALT 0131 k ALT 0199 i ALT 0207 a ALT 0215 B ALT 0223 5 ALT 0231 1 ALT 0739 ALT 247 7 ALT 0255 4 13 4 14 Configuration Editor User s Guide Spanish1 Font To enter the following characters press the recall key s Refer to the examples below Examples To enter the character press the recall keys
103. Tab dialog box should be as long if not longer then the Trend Scan Delay For information about calculating the trend value sample rate refer to Interval Expression field in the Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Tab dialog box or the Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes Tab dialog box Retry Delay Determines if there will be a delay between communication attempts when there is lost communications When the Retry Delay box is selected the PanelMate unit will increase the time interval of attempts to re establish communications as the length of time that the PanelMate unit and the PLC are not communicating increases If this feature is enable it will prevent several PLCs on a network from becoming busy unnecessarily if communications have not taken place over a long period of time When the Retry Delay box is not selected the PanelMate unit will immediately and continuously attempt to re establish communications If this feature is not enabled it will prevent any delays that may occur after successfully sending data to the PLC Bit Zero After Comm Fault Provides the capability to reset 1 e write zeroes to all PLC bits configured in the PLC Bit Reference fields for each control button Note that any bit writes in Variable Sized Control Buttons configured as Normally Closed Momentary will have a 1 written to PLC bits instead of a 0 when a reset operation occurs The PLC bits will reset when a PLC communication error has been cl
104. Tangent Arccosine NOT bit wise Power Divide Subtract Shift right Less than Greater than Equal to AND bit wise OR bit wise Logical OR zZ gt O l A GQ a O m 11 13 Operator abs nlog cos asin atan exp lt lt amp amp Description Absolute value Natural log Cosine Arcsine Arctangent Exponential Multiply Modulo Add Shift left Less than or equal to Greater than or equal to Not equal to XOR bit wise Logical AND All operators must be lower case when entered in a conditional expression The results of all trigonometric functions are in radians A space is required before and after the exp operator For example 2 exp 5 Appendix A Conditional Expression Operators A 3 Conditional Expression Examples The following conditional expression examples are grouped into categories Refer to the sections below Note that spaces are not required between references General Examples The following general examples are shown using a generic format See the appropriate Communication Driver Manual sent with your PanelMate software for more specific information 204 06 A conditional expression can be as simple as a single bit reference that resolves to true if the bit is on 204 03 amp amp 204 04 amp amp 205 07 This conditional expression resolves to true if bit 3 of word 204 bit 4 of word 204 and bit 7 of word 205 are all on 35
105. Window Silence Alarm Horn Enable Fault Relay PanelMate PC and all PanelMate Power Series models excluding PanelMate Power Series 1500 Reset PLC Com PanelMate Power Series 1500 Change Value Clear Home Select Table Entry Return and Select More Buttons Setup Page Execute Set Date Set Time Yes No Chapter 9 System Online Labels 9 5 9 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Online Labels Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompts When Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Options Startup Labels Standard i Allow Label Set Switching Preview Maintenance s Temp late Label Category to Edit Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompted User Online Label Standard Online Label Maintenance Template Activate Deact ivate Maintenance Template Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Maintenance Template e Activate e Deactivate Chapter 9 System Online Labels 9 7 System Online Labels
106. Y To enter the character C press the recall key C To enter the character press the recall keys ALT 0174 F h A B 7 4 H J f P Q R X i D 1 2 8 9 gt x y lt Dp Pu d p r L a s E M r j F N V Z 7 x U ALT 0123 ALT 0136 0 ALT 0144 mr ALT 0152 ALT 0160 ALT 0169 ALT 0176 1 ALT 01804 A ALT 0142 E ALT 0200 D ALT U2UB ALT 0216 a ALT 0224 ALT 023 ALT 02d0 ALT 0248 D ALT 0129 i ALT O137 ALT O0145 ALT 0153 ALT 0161 g ALT 0169 ALT O0177 ALT 01785 A ALT 0143 E ALT 0201 ALT 0209 i ALT 0217 ALT 0225 ALT 0233 w rn ALT 0241 Li ALT 0249 ALT 0740 5 ALT 0138 ALT 0146 ALT 0154 t ALT O162 L ALT 0170 2 ALT 0178 ALT 1B6E Ma A ALT 0144 E ALT 02707 ALT 0210 UI ALT 0218 ALT 0226 ALT 0234 ALT 0242 Li ALT 0250 ALT 0131 t ALT 0139 ALTHO laf ALT 0155 f da ALT 0163 ALT 0171 3 ALT 0179 a ALT o ay A ALT 0195 E ALT 0203 ALT 0211 U ALT 0219 a ALT 0227 ALT 02735 ALT 0243 ALT 0251 ALT 0142 l ALT 0140 ALT 0148 ALT 0156 m ALT 0164 ALT 01 72 ALT 0100 14 ALT 01808 A ALT 01496 T ALT 0204 ALT 0212 ALT 0220 a ALT 228 ALT
107. abbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Bar Trend Templates Bar Trend Attributes Tab e Bar Trend Templates Expressions Tab e Bar Trend Templates Control Definitions Tab 10 34 Configuration Editor User s Guide Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Tab The Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Control Definitions Histol emee Template Size in Cells Height fi E Width 2 I Pal Trigger Interval Type Interval Expression E Refresh Affected Graphics Online Units Visibility Expression Enable Conditional Visibility The fields in the Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Device Name Allows you to enter a device name The device name will display in the upper area of the template in the normal font You may press the Return key to insert a carriage return The Device Name field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Device Name check the Device Names box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box Note that the name used in the Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 22 characters for the Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Device Name field allows you to enter more than 22 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the
108. able Sized Control Button YS Control Button Attributes Control Definition Size in Pixels x JHE Y 251 a Height a0 a width a0 Refresh Affected Graphics Online Lens Color Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression E The fields in the Variable Sized Control Button Template VS Control Button Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Pixel Location Pixel Location X Allows you to enter the X location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Control Button Template Y Allows you to enter the Y location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Control Button Template Size in Pixels Height Allows you to enter the height of the Variable Sized Control Button Template in pixels Width Allows you to enter the width of the Variable Sized Control Button Template in pixels Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the variable sized control button to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the variable sized control button is updated Lens Color Allows you to select the color of the area inside the Variable Sized Control Button This button displays the standard Color Selection Palette Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Variable Sized Control Button Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If th
109. aceholder for the Variable Sized Graphic Template you will configure The Variable Sized Graphic Template consists of three tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphic Attributes Tab e Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphic States Tab e Variable Sized Graphic Template Control Definitions Tab 11 38 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphics Attributes Tab The Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphics Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Yarnable Sized Graphic Template 5 Graphic Attributes VS Graphic States Control Definitions Pixel Location x a Y 264 E Alarm Device Hame Refresh Affected Graphics Online Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression Po The fields in the Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphics Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Pixel Location X Allows you to enter the X location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Graphic Template Y Allows you to enter the Y location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Graphic Template Alarm Device Name Allows you to enter a device name to be used as part of an alarm message The Alarm Device Name field accepts normal sized characters The name used in the Alarm Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 25 characters for the Alarm Device Name will appear when the alarm
110. ach time the template is selected for numeric entry The template will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC 10 54 Configuration Editor User s Guide Display Template Display Templates are designed to be used like standard LED or LCD message units or displays They are most effective when used for informational messages and not as alarm messages Up to three independent lines of text can be written in a Display Template Press Directory for Additional Pages The actual creation of the message is done in the Message Library that can be selected from the Display Template Expressions Tab dialog box or the Database Treeview Window The Display Template consists of three tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Display Template Display Attributes Tab e Display Template Expressions Tab e Display Template Control Definitions Tab Chapter 10 Templates 10 55 Display Template Display Attributes Tab The Display Template Display Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Display Template x
111. adband The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value that must be crossed before Value is considered to have returned to normal status go out of alarm The deadband range prevents multiple alarm messages from being generated when Value is hovering around an alarm threshold Alarm Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is selected the operator must acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm message will be automatically removed from the list when the alarm condition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured 10 40 Configuration Editor User s Guide Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab The Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Bar Trend Template Fa Bar Trend Attributes Control Type Hone i The fields in the Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Type Allows you to define the control type used for the template The selections are described below None Allows the template to show a value that the operator cannot control Buttons Requires the operator to use control buttons to change a setpoint value If you choos
112. ameters Item Name Port Model Remote Tag File Path amp Name i DS ERCEL i CII hen 2 lt New entry gt Server Name Topic Name Delete Start Server Command Name EXCEL1 Model gt DDE Setup DDE Execute Command Default Port fi z Remote ID fo PLC Name EXCELI z Validation Time Out Value second fo B The DDE Server option is only available for PanelMate PC Pro configurations For more information refer to DDE Client and Server Communications and your DDE Communications Manual lt Default PLC Name gt Allows you to enter one of the PLC names or Unsolicited Device names Any word or bit address used in the configuration that does not specifically state the name of a PLC will be assumed to be referring to the default PLC It is to your advantage to use the name of the PLC most often referenced If you delete or change the selected default name the first name in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box will automatically become the Default PLC Name 7 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide Port Settings When the Port Settings button is clicked on the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box the Port Settings dialog box will appear Port Settings PORTH 1 Electrical Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Panty The Port Settings dialog box is used to select the communication parameters for the selected port Note that depending upon the device selected in the Device Use box some com
113. an object within a symbol you must select the symbol on the configuration page and choose the Break Symbol selection under the Object Menu to break the symbol into the original separate objects The objects may be edited and then you may choose the Make Symbol selection from the Object Menu again Chapter 5 Symbol Library 5 3 Symbol Properties When you double click on a symbol on a configuration page the Symbol Properties dialog box will appear Symbol Properties Symbol Hame Symbol Origin Offset A UO Y 0 Preview x Show Preview Pixel Location iz gt 213 a YT 169 a Refresh Affected Graphics Online Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression The Symbol Properties dialog box allows you to change the pixel location and the X Y offset of the symbol and preview the selected symbol The fields in the Symbol Properties dialog box are described below Symbol Name Displays the name of the symbol you selected Note that you may scroll through the symbol name list and preview each symbol if the Show Preview box is selected Symbol Origin Offset Displays the symbol s origin offset in pixels The default Symbol Origin Offset for X and Y is 0 and 0 no offset The blinking crosshair in the bounding box represents the origin location All of the objects that make up a symbol are drawn using an offset from the origin X Displays the X origin offset in pixels Y Displays th
114. anelMate unit and the Advanced Trending Template box must be selected in the New Configuration dialog box or in the Configuration Properties dialog box before a Line Trend Template can be created Line Trend Templates are designed to collect store and represent data in a manner that provides a historical perspective on how a single data point has changed and some insight on how the data point may behave in the future The Line Trend Template show current value setpoint and high and low alarm levels The current value and setpoint display digitally The Line Trend Template consists of three tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes Tab e Line Trend Template Pen Definitions Tab e Line Trend Template Control Definitions Tab 10 46 Configuration Editor User s Guide Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes Tab The Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes Control Definitions Device Name T emplate Size in Cells Height I Width 2 g Pe Trigger Interval Type Interval b Expression E Deadband Range 0 z X Alam Acknowledge Chart Bg Grid Line Setup C C Horizontai Lines 0 Pee ae fo a Samples Color tas Refresh Affected Graphics Online Enable Conditional Visibility Visibilitu Expression u C Fm The fields in the Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes
115. ange colors and shapes dynamically on PanelMate Power Series 1500 models 256 Greyscale Color Model 1555 1575 Enhances the PanelMate Power Series 1500 If you have a PanelMate Power Series 1500 Model 1555 and you select the 256 Greyscale Color feature you will have 16 shades of gray instead of the standard 8 shades PowerAnimation and PowerBlink If you have a PanelMate Power Series 1500 Model 1575 and you select the 256 Greyscale Color feature you will have a 256 color palette instead of the standard 16 colors PowerAnimation and PowerBlink PowerAnimation allows you to create animation by defining a series of graphic objects which blink in sequence and PowerBlink allows you to create graphic objects which blink at different rates Auto Centering Device Names Allows you to automatically center all Device Names within templates which have Device Names on all pages of this configuration Indicator Labels Allows you to automatically center all Indicator Labels within the Indicator Template label area on all pages of this configuration Control Button Labels Allows you to automatically center all Control Button Labels for all templates which have control buttons defined on all pages of this configuration 3 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide Page Properties When a configuration page is selected in the Database Treeview Window and the Properties button is clicked the Page Properties dialog box will appear Pag
116. anual focuses on describing the features of the PanelMate Power pro Configuration Editor Software What s Inside This manual is organized in the following way Table of Contents Preface Chapter 1 Installing the Configuration Software Chapter 2 Main Screen Chapter 3 Database Treeview Window Chapter 4 Font Editor Chapter 5 Symbol Library Chapter 6 System Parameters Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table Chapter 8 Message Library Chapter 9 System Online Labels Chapter 10 Templates Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates Chapter 12 Using Tags Appendix A Conditional Expression Operators Appendix B PLC Driver Help Files Appendix C PLC Communication Guidelines Appendix D Word and Bit References Appendix E Using Graphics from other Software Appendix F Editing Graphics Index Preface II Support Services It is Cutler Hammer s goal to ensure your greatest possible satisfaction with the operation of our products We are dedicated to providing fast friendly and accurate assistance That is why we offer you so many ways to get the support you need Whether it s by phone fax modem or mail you can access Cutler Hammer support information 24 hours a day seven days a week Our wide range of services include Technical Support 1 800 809 2772 If you are in the U S or Canada you can take advantage of our toll free line for technical assistance with hardware and software product selection system design and
117. appears beside this menu item Window Menu Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 33 The Window Menu is shown below Window Help Cascade Tile Arrange loons 1 CAPMCONFIGSMODEL Database The selections in the Window Menu are described below Cascade Arranges all open windows so they overlap The title bar of all windows remains visible so you can easily select a window Tile Arranges all open windows side by side so there is no overlap Arrange Icons Arranges all icons in orderly rows To reduce a configuration window to an icon click its button 1 Configurations Lists all open windows including those that have been reduced to icons To make a window active select its name from the list Note that when a Configuration Page Window is opened the Window Menu will not display the Configuration Page Window as an open window 2 34 Configuration Editor User s Guide Help Menu The Help Menu is shown below Help Contents F Using Help About The selections in the Help Menu are described below Contents Goes to the first topic of the Configuration Editor help file Using Help Provides general information about using help This is the standard Windows help file About PM Config Displays the About PanelMate Configuration Editor dialog box and lists system information Chapter 2 Main Screen About PanelMate Configuration Editor When you choose the About PM Config selection in the Help Menu the About
118. aracters Use spaces or a carriage return to move the text to the desired location Note that on the configuration page the text displayed in the control button will be truncated but when in Run Mode the text will automatically wrap to the next line If the text wraps to the next line you can eliminate a carriage return in some cases The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference The PLC Bit Reference field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button Expressions or conditional logic cannot be entered If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 11 26 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Readout T
119. associated with the same I O address then the first one found in the csv file is used 12 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Note To perform a reference to tag operation you must select the configuration in your Treeview If you have a page selected the Reference To Tag selection will not be accessible Configurations EE PanelMate 1500 E PanelMate 1700 L BE PanelMate 2000 EE PanelMate 3000 tA RE A E Configuration Pages Screen Fonts Symbol Library System Parameters PLC Mame and Port T able J Message Library ss System Online Labels L EE PanelMate 4000 H E PanelMate 5000 Configuration must be selected to perform operation Chapter 12 Using Tags 12 5 Exporting A Configuration When a configuration is exported and a pps file is created the Configuration software validates the information contained in the configuration When a reference is validated the configuration software searches the tag name field of the csv file for the tag name that was referenced If the tag name is found the I O address associated with the tag name is validated If the tag name is not found in the csv file theconfiguration software assumes the tag name to be an I O address and validates it 12 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide Accessing Tags When building a PanelMate application you may enter a tag name into any expression or reference Indicator Template Ea i Indicator T emplate Indicator Attr
120. at a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 11 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Bar Template Expressions Tab The Variable Sized Bar Template Expressions Tab dialog box is shown below Yanable Sized Bar Template wS Bar Attributes Control Definitions Expressions Value OoOo N High Alarm OOOO Low Alarm 0 Hax Calibration 100 00 Deadband Range a Min Calibration 0 0000 X Alarm Acknowledge The fields in the Variable Sized Bar Template E
121. ate Table Attributes Tab e Table Template Table Entries Tab Chapter 10 Templates 10 29 Table Template Table Attributes Tab The Table Template Table Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Table Template X Table Attributes Table Entries Device Name Template Size in Cells Height n Width 2 n Parameters Tag Edit Value Tag Current Value Tag Units Tag Password Protection None Refresh Affected Graphics Online Visibility Expression L Enable Conditional Visibility The fields in the Table Template Table Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Device Name Allows you to enter a device name The device name will display in the upper area of the template in the normal font You may press the Return key to insert a carriage return The Device Name field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Device Name check the Device Names box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box Note that the name used in the Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 22 characters for the Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Device Name field allows you to enter more than 22 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Template Size In Cells
122. ate property information in text format for all templates both fixed and variable sized found on the selected pages Graphic Data Prints all object property information in text format for all static graphics found on the selected pages Note that the Print function does not support graphic printing of PanelMate pages In order to print pixel image copies of PanelMate pages use the built in Windows clipboard feature to copy a bitmap image of the page to the clipboard Print Screen key or Alt and Print Screen keys Then use a standard bitmap editor such as Windows Paintbrush to edit and or print an image of the page to a printer Refer to the Printing a Configuration Page topic for more information Check the desired report options then click the OK button to return to the Configuration Editor Reports dialog box Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 21 Printing a Configuration Page For information on printing a configuration page from the PanelMate software refer to the steps below I A Open the configuration page you wish to print and maximize the page Create a rectangle the size of the entire page The rectangle should have a white fill and white pen Move the rectangle to the back This step is optional and is intended to provide a white background for templates and graphics if your printer does not print solid black well Hold the Alt key and press the Print Screen button on your keyboard to place an image of the configuration sof
123. ate will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 39 If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 11 40 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphic States Tab The Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphic States Tab dialog box is shown below Yanable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphic Attributes ws Graphic States Control Definitions Conditional Expression Alm Ac Conditional Expression Alarm Alarm x Acknowled x Acknowledge Symbol Library The fields in the Variable Sized Graphic Template VS Graphic States Tab dialog box are described below Symbol Name Conditional Expression Alm Ack Displays symbol names conditional expressions alarms and alarm acknowledgments configured for the Variable Sized Graphic Template If the conditional expression evaluates to true the associated symbol will be displayed in Run Mode Each Variable Sized Graphic Template can display up to five symbols depending upon conditions you define Each line in this list represents one of the symbols Symbol Allows you to enter the name of the symbol to be displayed when the corre
124. aunch the selected program New If you have a PanelMate configuration that was developed without tags you can export your references to a csv file using the New button Once created you can associate the csv file with a device in your source configuration or any other PanelMate configuration Refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags for more information Note The Tag Name File information will be saved into the PLC Name and Port Table in the PanelMate database Only devices defined in the PLC Name Parameters box can have an associated csv file Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 19 OPC Client Connectivity Note OPC client connectivity is only available for PanelMate PC Pro This functionality is not available for other PanelMate Power Series Power Pro products OLE for Process Control OPC is based on Microsoft s COM DCOM technology OPC allows client applications access to any data source device or database in a consistent manner PanelMate PC Pro is able to communicate as an OPC Client Refer to the OPC Server documentation for information on installing configuring or troubleshooting the OPC Server Operator Station Setup The following example outlines how to configure a PanelMate PC Pro operator station as an OPC Client 1 Open the OPC server configuration utility program and configure the server After the server has been configured close the server configuration utility 2 Open the PLC Name and Port Table In the Dev
125. ay Template Control Label PLC Bit Reference 1 Control Label PLC Bit H Fg Reference Bg The fields in the Display Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control labels and PLC bit references and allows you to define the control buttons on the right side of the PanelMate unit Line 1 corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all control buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at a particular location If a control button is defined a small arrow will be displayed in the lower left corner of a template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a control button is pressed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to a 0 zero thus providing a momentary input to the PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic Control Label Allows you to enter a label for a control button This field accepts three lines of normal sized alphanumeric characters The text does not automatically wrap Press the Return key to insert a carriage return The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box
126. b uuu u n T asua aS Nawus a Table Template Table Entries Tabi umu uuu uu u Su n uu EER p Trid We mpi ua asun umu at usu asua guasaha huuu ua ua aku chaska asuashh Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Tab Bar Trend Template Expressions TaD u uu s u z n u m S aie u S saa as sas Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab Pine Trend Tenpla e uuu n haqiaqawasaspuipaqtakupuaaaaqaypaqabiapaamaaapyqaqykaquuwamiasputaqhhaakakchasqahataQa Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes Tab Line Trend Template Pen Definitions Tab Line Trend Template Control Definitions Tab WIS Dl Aye INP Ae u naam ua ceclas oud sean etatatian E Display Template Display Attributes Tab Display Template Expressions Tabi u l u tee ee a ee eee Display Template Control Definitions Tab Chapter 11 Varlable Sized Templates ics cccsaceveccesscwsuasascicccaccpeceesecevauceseausavewioscceitecsskcvesevadeaseswsesexee Varrable Sized Indicator Template issnin un natus u aus Variable
127. bject up and down on the configuration page The value entered in the Y field determines the distance in pixels from the top of the page Size In Pixels Height Allows you to enter the height in pixels of the selected object Note that you can re size and re shape an object by dragging one of the selection handles with the selection tool Width Allows you to enter the width in pixels of the selected object Note that you can re size and re shape an object by dragging one of the selection handles with the selection tool Tip Objects can be resized using keys on the keyboard For information on editing objects using the keyboard refer to the Editing Graphics topic Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 29 Object Properties Visibility Tab Tip The Object Properties Visibility Tab dialog box only appears when you double click on a Text object Note that a Text object that has the Refresh Affected Graphics Online field or the Enable Conditional Visibility field checked cannot be made into a symbol The Object Properties Visibility Tab dialog box is shown below Object Properties Text EJ Refresh Affected Graphics Online Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression The Object Properties Visibility Tab dialog box allows you to configure the refresh graphics and visibility features The fields in the Object Properties Visibility Tab dialog box are described below Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all oth
128. ble Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Variable Sized Indicator Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the Ls button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 5 Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator States Tab The Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator Stat
129. box if the Show Preview box is selected Show Preview Allows the selected symbol to be shown in the Preview box Once a symbol has been created you may double click on the symbol to view the Symbol Properties dialog box Refer to the Symbol Properties topic for more information Note the following items e The objects that make up a symbol cannot be edited If you wish to change an object within a symbol you must select the symbol on the configuration page and choose the Break Symbol selection under the Object Menu to break the symbol into the original separate objects The objects may be edited and then you may choose the Make Symbol selection from the Object Menu again e If you create a symbol that contains a circle the circle may be displayed slightly out of position 1 pixel in X or Y dimension in Run Mode compared to what is displayed in the Configuration Software 2 32 Configuration Editor User s Guide View Menu The View Menu is shown below Window kL Toolbar w Status Bar Tool Palette The selections in the View Menu are described below Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar at the top of the screen When the toolbar is visible a check mark appears beside this menu item Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar at the bottom of the screen When the status bar is visible a check mark appears beside this menu item Tool Palette Shows or hides the tool palette When the tool palette is visible a check mark
130. bytes lt Add gt Allows you to add a device to the Node Message Type Table by configuring the Label MACID Message Type and Length fields and pressing the Add button lt Change gt Allows you to change a device that has been selected in the Node Message Type Table by re configuring the Label MACID Message Type and Length fields and pressing the Change button lt Copy gt Allows you to copy a device that has been selected in the Node Message Type Table lt Paste gt Allows you to paste a device in the Node Message Type Table Note that a device must be copied from the Node Message Type Table before you can paste a device in the table lt Delete gt Allows you to delete a device in the Node Message Type Table For more information about DeviceNet refer to the DeviceNet Communication Driver Manual Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 17 Tag Name File Note It may be helpful to review Chapter 12 Using Tags prior to configuring the Tag Name File dialog box To configure the Tag Name File dialog box the following steps must be completed 1 Select a PLC from the Device Use box in the PLC Name and Port Table 2 Click on the PLC in the PLC Name Parameters box 3 Click on the Tag File button The Tag Name File dialog box is shown below Tag Name File for Device plc1 Current Selected Tag Hame File PO hes Excel Tag Hame Column Reference Column Line ft Select the Tag Start Line The fields in
131. caateadetee 1 3 Chapter 2 Main SCCO ayuy u Su u u Saa aaa aaia aaaea oa T i 2 1 NI SOL sig eae ae a u umasa cetat cede s mQ anata uQ a Qmyuma Sks2 2 2 iN iizosztanua a asa su sssi E u yusa ha aasma asas s errr er 2 3 CIH ID Gb C uma E es 2 n a u us saman na 2 amu uu sm yaa 2 5 Uperade Duta e unas ssu t un kaa et tamalaelakendi isos clade u sasa 2 6 Backup Database yy umaman Q busua aa hamusasin usa 2 7 G Asta umasa u tu E as IS au aa yt aa aaa ea nasa 2 8 C OHNOCTSIOI SSS n uyta es tateaw salen cand a u shutak uui sanam sa aes 2 9 VST Ze PLC dil Sma opupus mpaka a Su ahua utu ha qhany panas kabus 2 10 liipaortuzuu g sau munaa E uma AEE A asua umaku qatasqa aqu T 2 11 OME te atecte chan E unan sas OE E EET E E E E EA 2 12 EDOTA a aad Rep sa nates E a aaa aaa naa tu unossua 2 13 Contionalion Editor REPOS dre uu uit ladies mu umu ua uN 2 19 EE NIDO Bila suny ukumi pani eS suu bansa hamana bumbu panpana uy 2 22 OBI ee NIGi 52525052 2055 Suatu iskuta manaa a u aaa pus aa 2 24 COD SCE PEO Melle ic spans Bests uu skua a sakunata am p kana asas 2 26 Nk CS yinb5boluu munaspas a unumanta at ills Gabe a sect sents e Mende leas 2 30 Vie WN iy yq asa a aka E E asas kaun ssy 2 32 WV NGOs Me DU eean E E A A E EE 2 33 J bi e a A a usa aaa uasua 2 34 About PanelMate Configuration Editor uuu s u Z u eee ieee wees 2 35 T oolbapu oss o Zugssuyoanu shun mtu amun suma 2 nam aspas am abis manmaspupaqsw 2 36 Color seleccion Palee uum k m m 2 uum hi ak uuu uuu D
132. cal document library punch in a fax number and receive the information immediately Website and E mail Address http www cutlerhammer eaton com automation chatechsupport ch etn com If you have Internet capabilities you also have access to technical support via our website at http www cutlerhammer eaton com automation The website includes technical notes frequently asked questions release notes and other technical documentation This direct technical support connection also offers you the ability to request assistance and exchange software files electronically Technical support messages and files can be sent to chatechsupport ch etn com IV Configuration Editor User s Guide Bulletin Board Service 614 899 5209 Parameters 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none 9600 28 8K baud If you have modem access you can dial in directly to our electronic bulletin board service for the latest product and company information File sharing product software downloads and our user message service are just a few of the things you will find online at 614 899 5209 Software Update Service 1 800 809 2772 FAX 614 899 4141 We also offer you the opportunity to take advantage of software upgrades advanced software notices and special software promotions through our Software Update Service When you register your software you will receive one year of free or reduced price upgrades along with all the other benefits of membership including 48 hour sh
133. cannerOBSCB Message Type BSC HACID jo is Length E is Note that when devices are added changed copied or pasted to the Node Message Type Table the devices are sorted in ascending order by their MACID and then sorted in alphabetical order of their Label The DeviceNet Setup dialog box is used to configure the PanelMate unit for DeviceNet communication The fields in the DeviceNet Setup dialog box are described below Label Allows you to enter a name that is used to reference messages This field is limited to 13 alphanumeric characters Note that the first letter must be an alpha character You can enter up to 379 labels MACID Defines the MACID node address embedded in the 11 bit CAN Controller Area Network identifier The valid range is 0 to 63 In most cases the MACID will contain the slave address If the message type is BSC bit strobe command the MACID field must contain the master address A configuration will typically have only one BSC message type entered in the Node Message Type Table 7 16 Configuration Editor User s Guide Message Type Allows you to define the type of message The message types are listed below PC Poll Command PR Poll Response BSC Bit Strobe Command BSR Bit Strobe Response CS Change of State MCSA Master Change of State Acknowledge MCS Master Change of State CSA Change of State Acknowledge Length Defines the length of the message in bytes The range is 0 to 400
134. cel Chapter 12 Using Tags 12 15 Step 6 To assign tag names to the references select the Excel radio button and then click on the Edit button This will launch Excel and display your csv file data in a spreadsheet format for easy editing If you chose a NO response in Step 4 your tag name and reference data will appear in the first two columns of the Excel spreadsheet as shown below X Microsoft Excel Sorter2 cs I File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Den GRY BBS nro Arial Be gt 2121 ii Fe 8 sl BZ UD A B E D E CSV Tag File Name SORTER2 CSV 2 PanelMate Configuration 15 TS 33 PPS 3 Device Name PLC1 4 Total Tags 27 5 6 Tag Name Reference Mo 01 w001 PaM M1 9 M12 07 M12 07 10 M12009 M12 09 MA M1300 M11300 M1301 M13 01 M1305 M11305 14 M1306 M13 06 Column 1 Column 2 contains contains Tag Names References Note Since your configuration did not contain any tag names the PLC reference information is placed in both the Tag Name column and the Reference column You will need to assign actual tag names as described in Step 7 If you chose a YES response in Step 4 your tag name and reference data will appear in the first two columns and your PLC reference data will appear in columns 3 4 etc Although data in columns 3 and beyond are not used by the Configuration software the data does provide an overall summary of y
135. cepts three lines of normal sized alphanumeric characters The text does not automatically wrap Press the Return key to insert a carriage return The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference for the control button This field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button You cannot use expressions or conditional logic If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 10 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide Readout Template Readout Templates are designed to be used as numerical readout devices on a control panel and are used to display a digital value The PanelMate unit also provides two ways for the operator to cha
136. ch other Destination Allows you to select the destination of the message The selections available are Screen Printer or Both Note that Display Templates containing messages with the Destination field configured as Both or Printer will not print in Run Mode if a screen saver is active This is not a characteristic of Variable Sized Display Templates if the Global Message field is configured as Yes in the Variable Sized Display Template Expressions Tab dialog box 8 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide lt Copy gt Copies a selected message or messages to the Windows clipboard lt Paste gt Places a message or messages from the clipboard to destinations you have selected in the Msg Message Destination box You can paste messages anywhere into the list but the number of selected destinations must equal the number of messages on the clipboard lt Clear gt Erases the selected message or messages from the Msg Message Destination box but does not place them on the clipboard lt Undo gt Allows you to undo the previous editing or formatting change lt Redo gt Allows you to redo the previous undo lt Find gt Opens the Find dialog box In the Find dialog box enter the text string you wish to search for in the Find What field choose the Match Whole Word Only or the Match Case selections if either or both selections apply and select the direction of the search Once you have entered the text string you may cl
137. ch will result in an error In the Validation Time Out Value field enter a value between 0 and 60 seconds A zero value indicates that no connection validation will be done Other values determine how often the PanelMate PC Pro operator station will check to make sure the DDE server is still running if data updates have not been sent within the time window For information on configuring a PanelMate PC Pro operator station as a DDE client refer to your DDE Connectivity Communication Driver Manual The PanelMate PC Pro operator station may also be used as a DDE Server i e supply data to another Windows program Examples of other applications that may be used as DDE Clients to the PanelMate PC Pro DDE Server are listed below A Microsoft Access database application which extracts PLC or controller data from the PanelMate PC Pro operator station and acts as an SQL Server to a host computer over an Ethernet network A Microsoft Visual Basic application that displays pop up windows that appear on top of PanelMate PC Pro screens A Microsoft Visual Basic application or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet which configures a recipe or machine setup by writing to PanelMate PC Pro s DDE Server A Microsoft Access database or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet that provides reports using data from a PanelMate configuration For information on using a PanelMate PC Pro operator station as a DDE server refer to your DDE Connectivity Communication Driver Manua
138. configuration become active when the configuration is downloaded Allow Password B Change Determines whether Password B can be changed during Run Mode If the Allow Password B Change box is not selected the password cannot be changed Note that the Change Password B Template will not appear on the Setup Page in Run Mode If the Allows Password B Change box is selected the password can be changed by an operator having the password To change the password in Run Mode select the Change Password B Template on the Setup Page Password Protection Entry into Offline Mode Allows you to select a type of protection for entering into the Offline Mode The selections are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswitch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B The page will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the Password A and Password B fields The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC 6 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide Set Date Time Allows you to select a type of protection for setting the date a
139. control button is pressed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to 0 thus providing a momentary input to the PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic The fields in the Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control are described below Control Indicator Position Allows you to select the position inside of the Variable Sized Bar Template for control indicator arrow The selections are listed below Left Below Right Above Display Allows you to determine if the arrow will always be visible or visible only when the template is selected The selections are Always and On Selection 11 14 Configuration Editor User s Guide Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control button labels and the associated PLC Bit Reference Line corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all control buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at that location Control Label Allows you to enter the control button label The Control Label field accepts three lines of normal size alphanumeric characters Use spaces or a carriage return to move the text to the desired location Note that on the configuration page the text displayed in the control bu
140. cted in the Selected Font field When a character has been selected the character will be displayed in the 8x16 pixel box You may use the scroll bar to scroll through the character set 4 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide English Font To enter the following characters press the recall key s Refer to the examples below Examples To enter the character press the recall keys Q To enter the character C press the recall key C To enter the character press the recall keys ALT 0174 r 1 L d N J B C D E F r N i x b H al J K L M N gt f F P Q R 5 T _ U V X 7 A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 lt gt A B C D E F H J K L MI N P Q R S T U V X Y Z ji a b C q e f J 2 O 0 x T ALT 0128 ALT 0136 T ALT 0144 r ALT 0152 LT 150 ALT 0168 ALT 0176 7 ALT O0184 A ALT 0192 ALT 0200 b ALT 0 208 5 ALT 02716 ALT Q0224 ALT 07237 ALT 0240 ja ALT 0248 T ALT 0129 i ALT 0137 ALT 0145 rr ALT 0153 4LT 0161 ALT 0169 ALT 0177 i ALT 0185 A ALT 0193 ALT 0201 3 ALT 0209 ALT 0217 ALT 225 ALT402733 i ALT 0241 ALT 0249 ALT 0130 ALT 0138 ALT 0146 ALT 0154 ALT 0162 d ALT 0170 z ALT 0178 ALT 0186 Pred H ALT 0154 ALT 0202 D ALT 0210 U ALT 0218 ALT 0226
141. d Click Continue Button to comp Click Cancel Button to usa the alam i E The Verification Status dialog box displays the configuration options of the file the items that will not be exported and the reason for not exporting the items Note that if you correct any errors you must export the configuration file again If you leave the Verification Status dialog box open while making changes to your configuration the changes will not be exported The configuration is always exported exactly as it appears in the Verification Status dialog box For more information about the verification process for exporting see the V2 1X Export Errors topic or the V2 1X Export Guidelines topic The selections on the Verification Status dialog box are described below Continue Exports the configuration according to the results listed in the Verification Results list Cancel Closes the dialog box without exporting the configuration Print Prints a hard copy of the verification list on the default printer 2 16 Configuration Editor User s Guide V2 1X Export Guidelines When exporting to a V2 1 X configuration the following guidelines should be considered e Text strings are decomposed into individual character elements V2 1X does not support text strings All text elements on a page are used to create a single V2 1 X Static Page Symbol that is made up of individual character elements You can place and edit the Character Elements individually
142. d Indicator Template Y Allows you to enter the Y location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Indicator Template Template Size In Pixels Height Allows you to enter the height in pixels for the Variable Sized Indicator Template Note that you can also re size the template by dragging one of the selection handles squares in any direction Width Allows you to enter the width in pixels for the Variable Sized Indicator Template Note that you can also re size the template by dragging one of the selection handles squares in any direction 11 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the variable sized template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Alarm Device Name Allows you to enter a device name to be used as part of an alarm message The Alarm Device Name field accepts normal sized characters The name used in the Alarm Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 25 characters for the Alarm Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Alarm Device Name field allows you to enter more than 25 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Ena
143. d displays the tag references and operators used in the Tag Expression For more information refer to Constructing Expressions Using Tags Operator Description Field Displays the operators and descriptions commonly used in constructing expressions Double clicking on an operator will add that operator to the expressions in the Tag Exp and Ref Exp fields Edit File By Tags From Tag Name File view only Launches Microsoft Notepad or Excel For more information refer to Editing Tags Used Tag Update Tag Cross Reference view only This button refreshes the list of used tags displayed in the Tag Name and Reference field Chapter 12 Using Tags 12 9 Constructing Expressions Using Tags The Expression Edit dialog box provides an easy powerful method of constructing expressions incorporating tag names and references H Expression Edit Dialog Iofs Tags From Tag Name File Tag Cross References Operator Description Parenthesis Devices Tag Name Reference Add Subtract B45B7124 Hultiply B45607126 f Divide B45687115 Equal to B45647116 lt gt Hot equal to B45B7120 lt Less than B45B7118 gt Greater than ce a lt Less or equal BAABB 5R0 gt Greater or equal E B4587118 kk Logical AND Sort List By _ B45B 1B2 ll Logical R hii a SORT POS 3 B450 106 OR bitwise it wise C Reference NOT bit wise Edit File By gt XDR bit wise 2 Bassas Z Modulo Notepad Power exp Expo
144. de c pmceonfigimodelpmconfig db Directory to save database before upgrading c ipmconhiigi model backupiyv320clgs Upgrade Progress Cancel The Upgrade Database dialog box allows you to upgrade any earlier version of the database to be compatible with new configuration software The default upgrade directory is created by adding the subdirectory backup v320cfgs to your current database directory Make sure you store the original database to a directory other than the standard backup directory used in the Backup Database dialog box To change the upgrade directory click on Directory to upgrade database button and enter the directory pathname Press the Upgrade button to upgrade your database When completed a Print button will appear to allow you to print the upgrade progress Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 7 Backup Database When you choose the Backup Database dialog box from the File Menu the Backup Database dialog box will appear Backup Database Database ta backup c pmconfigimodel Directory to backup database c pmconfigimodel backup y230cfgs Backup Progress Cancel The Backup Database dialog box allows you to backup your database The default backup directory is created by adding the subdirectory backup v330cfgs to your current database directory To change the backup directory click on Directory to backup database button and enter the directory pathname Press the Backup button to backup your database Wh
145. ded If the Overwrite Password A box is selected the passwords saved in the new configuration become active when the configuration is downloaded Allow Password A Change Determines whether Password A can be changed during Run Mode If the Allow Password A Change box is not selected the password cannot be changed Note that the Change Password A template will not appear on the Setup Page in Run Mode If the Allow Password A Change box is selected the password can be changed by an operator having the password To change the password in Run Mode select the Change Password A Template on the Setup Page Chapter 6 System Parameters 6 7 Password B Allows you to enter a numeric password between 0 and 65535 Passwords can be used to limit operator access to pages offline mode date time change and numeric entry from templates The default Password B sent with the demonstration screens is 2 Note that passwords above 65535 or passwords with leading zeroes are not supported in Run Mode Overwrite Password B Determines whether password B already set in the PanelMate online unit will be overwritten when a new configuration is downloaded You may want the operator to learn a pair of passwords that will not change with every new configuration If the Overwrite Password B box is not selected new passwords will be ignored when a new configuration 1s downloaded If the Overwrite Password B box is selected the passwords saved in the new
146. dialog box are described below Symbol Origin Offset Allows you to change the offset of the symbol s origin Note that if you modify the offset you will be modifying the offset of the actual symbol in the Symbol Library that may be used on several pages throughout the configuration If you increase the X and Y offsets the objects in the symbol will move left and down respectively If you decrease the X and Y offsets the objects in the symbol will move right and up respectively The blinking crosshair will remain at a constant position that is the origin location The values in the X and Y offsets are added to the original offset of each object from the upper left corner of the bounding box If an object in the symbol was originally 20 pixels in X from the blinking crosshair and you modified the X origin offset to be 10 the object would be drawn 30 pixels 20 10 30 from the blinking crosshair Likewise if you modified the X origin offset to be 10 the object would be drawn 10 pixels 20 10 10 from the blinking crosshair X Allows you to offset the symbol to the left or right Y Allows you to offset the symbol up or down For more information on the Symbol Origin Offset refer to the Symbol Origin Offset Example 5 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide Symbol Origin Offset Example A circle has been created with a height of 100 pixels and a width of 100 pixels and made into a symbol The blinking crosshair that represent
147. dition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured Chapter 10 Templates 10 7 Indicator Template Control Definitions Tab The Indicator Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Display Template Display Attributes Control Label PLC Bit Reference 1 Control Label PLC Bit W Fg Relerence Bg The fields in the Indicator Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control labels and PLC bit references and allows you to define the control buttons on the right side of the PanelMate unit Line 1 corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all control buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at a particular location If a control button is defined a small arrow will be displayed in the lower left corner of a template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a control button is pressed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to a 0 zero thus providing a momentary input to the PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic Control Label Allows you to enter a label for a control button This field ac
148. dix A Conditional Expression Operators A 1 Conditional Expression Operators eosi e a u u Dy y 2 uu u A 2 Conditional Expressioi ExXamples u u ul y uu uu Du uu um yaa A 2 Appendix B Communication Driver Help Files B 1 Communication Driver Help Fils a u acetates a Sun a aha ian nia aa B 2 Appendix C Word and Bit References C 1 WOE andl IG TERM CCS ux xm Su A eee C 2 PEC Word REICKCN e suum u uynuy nanan tue aal C 2 PEC Bit Rete a uuu a ao a A C 5 Appendix D Using Graphics from other Software D 1 Usinge Graphics from otherSoffWare u ua n u a a a aa ae Eat a D 2 Appendix E Editing Graphics ku u aun aG usus E 1 Edno raps sascha tonic suai uya mu A uya asua E 2 Appendix F Configuration Editor Problens F 1 Contiguration Editor Problems yeh ey y e aoa F 2 Preface l Preface Welcome to Cutler Hammer s PanelMate Power Pro Configuration Editor Software User s Guide This chapter describes the contents of this manual and provides information on Support Services II Configuration Editor User s Guide About This Manual Purpose This m
149. e Buttons the dialog box will change Refer to the Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control topic for more information Numeric Requires the operator to enter a setpoint value If you choose Numeric the dialog box will change Refer to the Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control topic for more information Note that if Numeric or Button is selected a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available Chapter 10 Templates 10 41 Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control The Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control is shown below Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Control Definitions Control Label PLC Bit Reference 1 Control Label a PLC Bit wW Ea Reference Bg Control Type Euton The Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control defines the control buttons on your PanelMate unit If a control button is defined a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a control button is pressed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to 0 thus providing a momentary input to t
150. e information PLC Name Parameters Item Name Port Model Remote ID Displays the item number PLC name port number model and remote ID If you choose the lt New Entry gt selection you can configure a new PLC using default values for the Name Port Model and Remote ID fields If you select lt New Entry gt the Copy Paste and Delete buttons will be disabled Name Allows you to enter names for each PLC to be addressed This name is used by the PanelMate unit and does not make reference to the PLC directly This name should be used when specifying word and bit addresses during page development Port Allows you to define which ports will be used to communicate to each PLC If a port has been configured as No Usage or Serial Printer the port number will not appear in the Port field Model Allows you to choose from a list of model types for each device You should choose the model most closely related to the device being used Remote ID Allows you to define the ID or node of each device 7 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide lt Add gt Allows you to add a new entry to the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box If you select a port In the Port field select a model in the Model field and configure the Name and Remote ID fields you can click the Add button to add a new entry to the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box lt Change gt Allows you to change a selected entry in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box If you select
151. e Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode 11 46 Configuration Editor User s Guide If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the LJ button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 47 Variable Sized Control Button Template Control Definitions Tab The Variable Sized Control Button Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below VYarnable Sized Control Button YS Control Button Attributes Control De
152. e Indicator Template as 1 This value cannot be changed Width Allows you to enter the width of the Indicator Template as 1 or 2 10 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Indicator Label Font Defines the font used in the status lower area of the template You can select Normal Double High or Quad font For maximum readability choose the largest size that fits in the template Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in R
153. e Library The message Selected in this box also displays in the Preview box If more than one message is selected the last one displays in the Preview box The Msg Message Destination box has three fields The fields are described below Msg Displays the message number The message number is used to recall the message in the Display Template and Variable Sized Display Template All messages appear in numerical order The number of messages that can be entered will vary depending on the product model and the options installed Refer to the Capacity Expansion Kit section in the Product Options topic for information about the number of messages you can enter Message Displays the message text A single message may contain up to five register references and clock or calendar references Refer to the Register References within Messages topic or the Clock and Calendar References within Messages topic for more information While in Run Mode the register references are replaced with the numeric register content from the PLC Destination Displays the destination of the message 1 e Screen Printer or Both To select one message place the cursor on the message then click the left mouse button A selected message displays in the highlight color To select a range of messages select the first message and then press the Shift key while you select the second message All messages between the two messages will be selected You can also drag the
154. e PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC 10 28 Configuration Editor User s Guide Table Template Table Templates are designed to display a table of values and accept numeric entry for all the items in the table Table Templates can be used for machine setup recipe entry or for any application requiring a high density display and entry of information Table Templates can support up to 50 independent entries Each entry has a tag name current value edit value and a units field The Table Template has built in scroll capabilities to allow you to select the desired entry field A scroll indicator at left side of the template indicates top and bottom with stop bars The presence of more items is identified by up or down arrows The control buttons on the right of the screen permit up down scrolling return to home or open a selected field for numeric entry The control indicator at the bottom left of the template indicates control is available for a particular entry You can configure each entry for numeric entry or for display only The Table Template consists of two tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Table Templ
155. e Properties Page Humber i Title Page One Protection None i Maintenance Templates Allow on Page Enable Writes Protection Hone Flexible Page Layout IX Page Status Banner X Cancel Key X Alarm Table X Default Buttons The Page Properties dialog box is used to determine features for individual configuration pages and to determine features for the Maintenance Template For more information about the Maintenance Template refer to the Maintenance Template topic For more information about the Maintenance Template topic refer to the Maintenance Template topic in the Online Operation User s Guide The fields in the Page Properties dialog box are described below Page Number Allows you to enter a page number for the configuration page Title Allows you to enter a title for the page Chapter 3 Database Treeview Window 3 11 Protection Allows you to control access to individual pages If the operator does not enter the correct password or if operator cannot unlock the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit the page will not be displayed The selections available are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswitch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B Only Tip If a page is password protected but is selected as the startup page in the Startup Page field in the System Parameters General Tab dia
156. e Tool The Advanced Trending Template box must be selected in the New Configuration dialog box or in the Configuration Properties dialog box before a Line Trend Template can be created The Line Trend Template tool allows you to place a Line Trend Template on the page Line Trend Templates collect store and display data to provide a historical perspective on how e A single data point has changed e A data point may behave in the future Refer to the Line Trend Template topic for more information Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 45 Display Template Tool The Display Template tool allows you to place a Display Template on the page Display Templates are used like standard LED or LCD message units or displays Refer to the Display Template topic for more information Variable Sized Indicator Template Tool The Variable Sized Indicator Template tool allows you to place a Variable Sized Indicator Template on the page Variable Sized Indicator Templates let you use small indicators to create high density status displays on your page Refer to the Variable Sized Indicator Template topic for more information Variable Sized Bar Template Tool The Variable Sized Bar Template tool allows to place a Variable Sized Bar Template on the page Variable Sized Bar Templates are the analog meters and face plates of a control panel They indicate a value in analog fashion using a bar graph that shows these values in graphical form e Current value e Setpoint
157. e Y origin offset in pixels Preview Displays the selected symbol in the Preview box if the Show Preview box is selected Show Preview Allows the selected symbol to be shown in the Preview box 5 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Pixel Location Allows you to change the pixel location for the selected symbol X Allows you to move the symbol to the left or right on the configuration page The value entered in the X field determines the distance in pixels from the left edge of the page Y Allows you to move the symbol up and down on the configuration page The value entered in the Y field determines the distance in pixels from the top of the page Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the symbol to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the symbol is updated Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the symbol will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the symbol will always appear on the page Note that a symbol that is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the symbol is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations It is also important
158. e any interval has been missed Low sample values might also cause a blank bar to appear To distinguish as low sample value from a missed interval configure the minimum calibration lower than the lowest expected minimum value e For PanelMate Grayscale units Interval is the value that displays as a medium intensity horizontal bar to the right of the Value 1 bar e For PanelMate Color units Interval is the value that displays as a blue horizontal bar to the right of the Value 1 bar Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information 10 36 Configuration Editor User s Guide Discrete Expression Appears only when the Discrete trigger type is selected The Discrete Expression field allows you to enter an expression so that a trend will be sampled when the result of the expression changes from false to true If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by us
159. e box is selected the operator must acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm message will be automatically removed from the list when the alarm condition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured 10 14 Configuration Editor User s Guide Readout Template Control Definitions Tab The Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Readout Template Readout Attributes Control Type Hone The fields in the Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Type Allows you to define the control type used for the template The selections are described below None Allows the template to show a value that the operator cannot control Buttons Requires the operator to use control buttons to change a setpoint value If you choose Buttons the dialog box will change Refer to the Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control topic for more information Numeric Requires the operator to enter a setpoint value If you choose Numeric the dialog box will change Refer to the Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control topic for more information Note that if Numeric or Button is selected a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the opera
160. e disabled To PLC Allows you to write the page number of the currently displayed page to a register in the PLC during Run Mode Note that there are two unique page numbers The Alarm Page number is 10000 and the Setup Page number is 10001 All other pages will use the page number defined in the New Configuration Page dialog box or the Page Properties dialog box From PLC Allows you to scan a register in a PLC and change to the page number matching the register value When a new valid page number is detected in the Page Change Register the title bar will blink The page does not change immediately if the operator has selected a control template but waits until the control template is de selected This requirement can be changed if the Allow Immediate Page Change box is selected in the Systems Parameters General Tab dialog box If the Page Change Register receives a valid page number that is the same as the number in the register it will not change pages If the Page Change Register receives an invalid number it will remain on the current page If the operator is pressing a control button at the time a page change from the PLC occurs the CANCEL key will need to be pressed to initiate the page change Note that the Page Change Register will override Page Password Protection If necessary use Remote Sending of Passwords and PLC ladder logic to implement a protection scheme Remote Sending Of Passwords Only bit references are allowed in
161. e exponential format E the total width of the formatted value w must be at least eight greater than the number of decimal places d Binary Based Formats The binary based format types are 1 Hexadecimal 2 Octal 3 Binary For binary based formats digits are inserted for the entire width of the format size there is no blank padding If a value for a binary format has too many digits for the specified format size the most significant digits of the value are truncated until the number will fit in the size specified Example value 300 Presentation with H4 format 012C Presentation with H2 format 2C 8 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide Formatting Examples The following table shows examples of the different formatting types The data type actual data and visual appearance are shown The heading on the column for visual appearance marks 13 column locations to help reference the placement of characters Columns Type Data 0123456789012 15 324 324 14 521 2 1 12 8 73 9 13 7321 Oe S H 824 67 8 2 5 D7 421 45 421 450 D4 23 45 23 4 25 H3 255 OFF H5 255 FFFO 1 H2 300 2 C 04 54 0066 03 88 45 130 Ol 21 5 B9 100 001100100 B4 86 0110 F5 1 523 46 ey ae a 5 F10 4 253 21 Z 59 2 100 B52 326 23 Oy Fee he x F8 3 43 888 43 888 F5 0 397 52 3 9 8 E12 3 324 1 3 241E 5E 02 E13 2 0 06734 6 73E 02 E9 0 156 2 2E 02 D4 999 89 1000 D6 6245 21 62 4 2 D1 0 04 0 D1 9 12 9 D4 82345 2 ee eae D3 1 444 1
162. e operator to use control buttons to change a setpoint value If you choose Buttons the dialog box will change Refer to the Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control topic for more information Numeric Requires the operator to enter a setpoint value If you choose Numeric the dialog box will change Refer to the Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control topic for more information Note that if Numeric or Button is selected a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 13 Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control The Variable Sized Bar Templates Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control is shown below Yarnable Sized Bar Template VS Bar Attributes Control Definitions Control Indicator 7 22 2 amp e Aerncero oq 222 5 Position Left Display Always Control Label PLC Eit Reference Ix Control Label e PLC Bi ccc Fu Haa a a Bu Control Type Ee The Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control defines the control buttons on your PanelMate unit If a control button is defined a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a
163. e the lowest point of the line trend This value displays on the template This six character text box accepts 6 digits or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the field 10 50 Configuration Editor User s Guide Value Expression Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Line Trend Template This expression is any mathematical operation to be performed on the monitored value before it is displayed on the screen The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags The following examples of expressions use a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references 123 The expression can be a single word reference This example references word 123 123 10 124 This mathematical expression includes PLC references and constants that solve to a value namel 242 name2 243 Information from multiple PLCs can be included in the same expression In this expression word
164. eared i1 e communication with the PLC has been re established and the Enable Fault Relay control button is pressed The Bit Zero After Comm Fault field also controls whether the PLC control bits are reset on power up of the PanelMate unit If the Bit Zero After Comm Fault box is selected the automatic reset of all PLC bits will be enabled at both power up and after a communications fault reset If the Bit Zero After Comm Fault box is not selected the automatic reset of PLC bits will be disabled at both power up and after a communications fault reset Note Ifthe Bit Zero After Comm Fault box is selected the Fault Relay De energize On Alarm box must be de selected If the fault relay is enabled via the Remote Enable Fault Relay Bit from the PLC field the Bit Zero After Comm Fault field is disabled The Bit Zeros After Com Fault field is only applicable when the Enable Fault Relay control button is pressed Refer to Appendix B Momemtary Pushbutton Operation in the PanelMate Power Series Online Operation User s Guide for more information on momentary pushbutton precautions Fault Relay De energize On Alarm Allows you to control what happens to the PanelMate unit s fault relay when a alarm occurs If the Fault Relay De energize on Alarm box is selected the fault relay will be de energized when a communication error or system error occurs when power is lost when an alarm condition is detected or when the PanelMate unit is put into o
165. ed in the pps file The Configuration software processes tag references in four situations e Entering tag information when configuring a template e Saving a configuration e Reference to tag replacement operations tag refresh e Exporting a configuration Entering Tag Information If a device in a configuration has an associated csv file when a reference is entered into the template s Control Definition PLC Bit Reference field or Conditional Expression field see Chapter 10 the reference is validated The Configuration software searches the tag name field of the csv file for the tag name that was referenced If the tag name is found the I O address corresponding with the tag name is validated If the tag name is not found in the csv file the configuration software assumes the tag name to be an I O address and validates it Note When the Configuration software searches for a tag name in a csv file the search is case insensitive Saving A Configuration When a configuration is saved the Configuration software will save the csv file location and format information into the PLC Name and Port Table in the PanelMate database When the configuration is opened the configuration software will automatically open the associated csv file Note When opening a configuration if the csv file specified in the PLC Name and Port Table can not be found the tags in the csv file will not be loaded and a warning message will appear Refere
166. ed the PanelMate unit s unsigned 32 bit word limit 4 294 967 295 A value exceeding the limit will cause a Watchdog Time out error or generate an Exception error during online or runtime operation You may wish to consider using scaled integer values instead of floating point values High Alarm Allows you to enter a High Alarm Expression The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression If Value 1 exceeds the High Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the trend sample will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units the trend sample is displayed in high intensity The trend sample will continue to be displayed in high intensity as other trend samples are being collected as long as Value 1 exceeds the High Alarm Expression value A High Alarm bar is shown in high intensity to the left of the Bar Trend Template e For PanelMate Color units the trend sample is displayed in red The trend sample will continue to be displayed in red as other trend samples are being collected as long as Value 1 exceeds the High Alarm Expression value A High Alarm bar is shown in red to the left of the Bar Trend Template The High Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an
167. ed with F or E format Format type D floating decimal point permits the decimal point to float in the display depending on the register s value This contrasts with format type F fixed decimal point which formats a value with a fixed decimal location Format type F may be useful when creating a column of values Floating decimal point format type should not be confused with floating point mathematics or floating point data types that cannot be read or manipulated in the PanelMate unit Chapter 8 Message Library 8 7 Each format has a maximum number of characters it can display and a number cannot be completely displayed if the format description is too small The following are the width limits for each format type HII H O11 B32 D65 F65 d E65 d d Largest Integer value width is 11 Largest Hexadecimal value width is 8 Largest Octal value width is 11 Largest Binary value width is 32 Largest Floating Decimal Point value width is 65 Largest Fixed Decimal Point value width is 65 Largest Exponential value width is 65 Largest ASCII character width is 2 The least significant 16 bits are used in this order high byte low byte When using both characters ensure the PanelMate unit s default format can read numbers that use the high byte An alternate word reference format may be necessary 1 e U16 decimal places For examples using the General Format Expression refer to the General Format Expression Examples top
168. ee may vary depending upon the type of printer installed in your system lt Exit gt Closes the dialog box without printing lt Help gt Calls for online help 2 20 Configuration Editor User s Guide Configuration Editor Reports Options Note that the Print function does not support printing the System Online Labels and Fonts When you press the Report Options button on the Configuration Editor Reports dialog box the Configuration Editor Report Options dialog box will appear Configuration Editor Report Options Select the desired report options Configuration Header System Parameters PLC Name and Port Table Directory of Configuration Pages Message Library X Template Data Reports X Graphic Data The Configuration Editor Report Options dialog box allows you to select which options will appear on your printed report The fields in the Configuration Editor Reports Options dialog box are described below Configuration Header Prints information contained in the Configuration Properties dialog box System Parameters Prints information from the System Parameters dialog boxes for the selected configuration PLC Name and Port Table Prints information from the PLC Name and Port Table dialog boxes for the selected configuration Directory of Configuration Pages Prints a list of all pages and page properties Message Library Prints the contents of the Message Library Template Data Prints all templ
169. efer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Low Alarm The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression If Value is less than the Low Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list e For PanelMate Grayscale units the variable sized template is displayed with medium intensity characters on a blinking high intensity background e For PanelMate Color units the template is displayed with white characters on a blinking red background The Low Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the Ls button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Deadband Range Allows you to enter a number between 0 99 that will represent the percentage of the high alarm value minus the low alarm value that defines the widt
170. eference to Tag Replacement 2 4 12 3 Reshape Tool 2 40 S Save As 2 2 Select Symbol 2 40 Selection Tool 2 40 Shipping Address HI Software Update Service III Spanish Font 4 14 Status Bar 2 38 Support Services II Swedish1 Font 4 16 Symbol Library 5 2 Symbol Origin 5 5 Symbol Origin Offset Example 5 6 Symbol Properties 5 3 Symbol Tool 2 42 System Online Labels 9 2 System Online Labels Alarm Text 9 12 System Online Labels Contrast Adjustment Soft Key Prompts 9 13 System Online Labels Display System Configuration Info 9 11 System Online Labels Error Messages 9 9 System Online Labels Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompts 9 6 System Online Labels Miscellaneous Soft Key Prompts 9 4 System Online Labels Miscellaneous Text 9 10 System Online Labels Setup Page 9 8 System Online Labels Touchscreen Button Templates 9 14 System Online Labels Touchscreen Control Keys 9 16 System Online Labels Touchscreen Keypad Entry Labels 9 15 System Online Labels User Entry Soft Key Prompts 9 7 System Parameters 6 1 System Parameters Communications Tab 6 9 System Parameters General Tab 6 3 System Parameters Password Tab 6 4 System Parameters Remote Tab 6 11 Index I 3 T Table Template 10 28 Table Template Table Attributes Tab 10 29 Table Template Table Entries Tab 10 31 Table Template Tool 2 44 Tag Name Files 7 17 Tag Reference Processing
171. emplate Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control The Variable Sized Readout Templates Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control is shown below Vanable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Control Definitions Control Indicator Position Left Display Always Input Value Expression E Target Word Address L J Password Protection None pe Control Type reer The fields in the Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control are described below Control Indicator Position Allows you to select the position inside of the Variable Sized Readout Template for control indicator arrow The selections are listed below Left Below Right Above Display Allows you to determine if the arrow will always be visible or visible only when the template is selected The selections are Always and On Selection Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 27 Input Value Expression Allows you to enter any mathematical expression that must be performed on the operator s input before the number is stored in the PLC A question mark inside brackets 7 is used to designate the operator input The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names
172. emplates variable sized templates variable sized control buttons or symbols in the collection of objects you wish to make into a symbol the Make Symbol selection in the Object Menu will be disabled Also note that if you have a Text object selected and the Refresh Affected Graphics Online field or the Enable Conditional Visibility field is checked in the Object Properties Visibility Tab dialog box the Make Symbol selection will be disabled When a group of allowable objects are selected on a configuration page and you choose the Make Symbol selection from the Object Menu the Make Symbol dialog box will appear Hake Symbol Symbol Origin Offset Y 0 x Preview Symbol Hame xX Show Preview r The Make Symbol dialog box allows you to create symbols Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 31 The fields in the Make Symbol dialog box are described below Symbol Name Allows you to enter the name of the symbol you wish to create Note that when a symbol has been created the symbol name will appear in the Database Treeview Window under the Symbol Library selection For more information on the Symbol Library refer to the Symbol Library topic Symbol Origin Offset Displays the symbol s origin offset in pixels The default Symbol Origin Offset for X and Y is 0 and 0 no offset X Displays the X origin offset in pixels Y Displays the Y origin offset in pixels Preview Displays the selected symbol in the Preview
173. empting to resize these objects in the Configuration Editor may cause a General Protection Fault Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 23 Delete Erases selected object s from the screen and does not place the object s in the Windows clipboard Note that the Configuration Software cursor may remain as an hourglass when deleting objects even after the deletion is complete When the mouse is moved the original cursor will return if the deletion is complete Select All Selects all objects in the current configuration page Select Next Selects the next object in the order in which objects were created Select Previous Selects the previous object in the order in which objects were created Note that the keyboard keys used to select resize move select next or select previous objects will not function on a configuration page when another window has been selected For example if an object is selected and the cursor is placed inside of the color selection palette and the Arrow keys are used to select different colors on the palette the Arrow keys cannot be used to move the selected object unless the configuration page and the object are re selected This also applies when an object is selected and the cursor is placed inside of the Select Font box or the Pen Width box on the toolbar Snap To Grid If this item is checked objects are automatically aligned with an invisible on screen grid when existing objects are moved or new objects are placed
174. en completed a Print button will appear to allow you to print the backup progress 2 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide Save As When you select a configuration filename in the Database Treeview Window and choose the Save As selection from the File Menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar the Save As dialog box will appear Save As Product Type PanelMate 3000 Hame Configuration Two Configuration One The Save As dialog box allows you to save a configuration file This selection is used if you are saving a new configuration or if you wish to save a configuration under another name Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 9 Conversion When you select a configuration filename in the Database Treeview Window and choose the Convert selection from the File Menu the Conversion dialog box will appear Conversion Convert Convert Configuration One from PanelMate 3000 to m PanelMate 1500 C PanelMate 1700 PanelMate 2000 PanelMate 4000 PanelMate 5000 PanelMate PC This Conversion dialog box allows you to convert a configuration file from one PanelMate hardware model to another e g PanelMate Power Series 2000 to PanelMate Power Series 3000 If there are any conversion issues between PanelMate models a dialog box will appear which will state the issues and ask if you wish to continue with the conversion If you press the Yes button to continue be aware of the issues noted in the dialo
175. ences C 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Word and Bit References This topic describes the word and bit formats used by the PanelMate unit for reading and writing data to from the PLC PLC Word References All of the editors use the same format for referencing PLC words To refer to a specific word in any expression use the following format plcname word format The fields plcname and format are optional If no information is entered in these fields default values are used PLC Word Format Fields plcname word format The six character or less name of the designated PLC followed by a comma The PLC name is defined in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box See the PLC Name and Port Table topic for more information about this name If plcname is omitted the default PLC defined in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box is used This field is optional The actual PLC reference number of the word to be read or written using the addressing nomenclature of the PLC defined by plcname See the specific PLC section for more information about word reference numbers A three character or four character code preceded by a number sign This code specifies the format of all PLC data read or written If format is omitted the default formats will be used as noted in the Communication Driver Manuals 816 U16 S32 U32 BCD3 BCD4 BCD6 BCD8 BIN3 BIN4 BIN6 BIN8
176. er Entry Soft Key Prompts e Setup Page e Error Messages e Miscellaneous Text e Display System Configuration Info e Alarm Text e Contrast Adjustment Soft Key Prompts e Touchscreen Button Templates e Touchscreen Keypad Entry Labels e Touchscreen Control Keys User Online Label Displays user defined labels for the label category selected in the Label Category to Edit field If you select a label in this list the label will display in the Label field where it can be edited Standard Online Label Displays default standard labels for the label category selected in the Label Category to Edit field Most labels that appear in the Standard Online Labels scroll box cannot be edited For safety purposes when creating online labels in another language the Change Online Labels label in the Miscellaneous Soft Key Prompts category will remain in English when User Online Labels are displayed The user defined label for Change Online Labels will only be shown when the Standard Online Labels are displayed Label Allows you to edit the label selected in the User Online Label scroll box Any labels the are edited in the Label field will be reflected in the Preview box and in the User Online Label scroll box Font Allows you to select a font for the label you are editing The choices are Normal Graphic Double High and Quad font In order to select the Double High or Quad font the Redefine Double High Font field or the Redefine Quad Font field must be
177. er templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the Text object to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the symbol is updated Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine 1f the Text object will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the Text object will always appear on the page It is important to note that an text object that is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the text object is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the Text object will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the Text object will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode 2 30 Configuration Editor User s Guide Make Symbol A symbol is a collection of graphic objects grouped together and given a name The allowable objects for a symbol are lines rectangles ellipses arcs polygons text and bitmaps If there are any fixed t
178. es groups and indicator selections Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 13 Export As The Export As dialog box allows you to export to an earlier PanelMate Power Series configuration file or to a PanelMate Series V2 1X configuration file for earlier Configuration Editor software versions Tip If you wish to export to a current PanelMate Power Series configuration file refer to the Export topic for more information Tip For guidelines to consider before exporting to a V2 1X configuration refer to the V2 1X Export Guidelines topic Note that configuration files must be exported before being transferred to the PanelMate unit When you select a configuration filename in the Database Treeview Window and choose the Export As selection from the File Menu the Export As dialog box will appear KN Export As File Hame Directories Epps c 4pmcontigionline clg ik F Cancel gt cA gt PHCOHFIG gt ONLINE f CFG List Files of Type Drives v3 32 PanelM ate Power Seres 3000 Grayscale B c CHS Before the configuration file is exported the configuration file will be verified The verification process checks for the following e Number of messages e Number of pages e Presence of PowerGraphics e Compatibility issues 2 14 Configuration Editor User s Guide If you select to export to a PanelMate Series V2 1X configuration file a V2 11 Options dialog box will appear 2 11 Options Fa Addit
179. es Tab dialog box is shown below anable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator Attributes Alarm Message Conditional Expression n s Conditional E Xpression o Colors __ r Alarm Pen a j Alarm Alarm Message Fill X Acknowledge The fields in the Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator States Tab dialog box are described below Alarm Message Conditional Expression Alm Ack Displays alarm messages conditional expressions alarms and alarm acknowledgments configured for the Variable Sized Indicator Template If the conditional expression evaluates to true the associated template characteristics will be displayed in Run Mode Each Variable Sized Indicator Template can display up to five alarm messages depending upon conditions you define Each line in this list represents one of the alarm messages Conditional Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression The conditional expression can be a numerical logical or relational expression that evaluates to true or false When a numerical expression is evaluated if the result is even least significant bit 0 the value is false and if the result is odd least significant bit 1 the value is true In Run Mode if an expression is satisfied true or false the characteristics defined for that line are used to display the template If more than one expression is satisfied at the same time the line with the highest priority displays Line
180. eses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags The following examples of expressions use a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references 123 The expression can be a single word reference This example references word 123 123 10 124 This mathematical expression includes PLC references and constants that solve to a value namel1 242 name2 243 Information from multiple PLCs can be included in the same expression In this expression word 242 in PLC namel is added to word 243 in PLC name2 Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Note that Bar Trend Templates will not update if all references in these templates are unsolicited If at least one reference in a Bar Trend Template is not unsolicited then all references will update 10 38 Configuration Editor User s Guide When floating point references are used be certain the maximum possible value will not exceed the PanelMate unit s unsigned 32 bit word limit 4 294 967 295 A value exceeding the limit will cause a Watchdog Time out error or generate an
181. ess dialog box are described below PORT Displays the I O port which was selected in the Port Device Use Local ID box in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box Maximum Node Address Set the maximum node address This parameter should be set as low as possible to minimize the amount of time used in soliciting data when initializing the link and minimizes the amount of unnecessary token passes The Maximum Node Address must match the maximum node address of all other devices on the DH 485 For more information about Data Highway 485 communication refer to the Allen Bradley Communication Driver Manual 7 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup To configure the Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup dialog box the following steps must be completed 1 The I O port must be selected and Allen Bradley Remote I O must be selected in the Device Use field in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box 2 Configure the Name Port Model Remote ID and Default PLC Name and click the Add button to place the information in the Item Name Port Model Remote ID box in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box 3 Note that the selection chosen in the Model field will determine the number of racks that will appear in the Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup dialog box When configuring the I O port for Allen Bradley Remote I O communication select the PLC 3 model for PLCs with more than seven racks PLC models e g PLC 5 40 5 60 5
182. ession limits entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register Any value outside this range has no effect on the value in the register Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Target Word Address Allows you to define the location of the operator s input in the PLC as the result of the Input For example to store a value in register 364 as a signed 16 bit integer use Target Word Address 364 S 16 Note that the example uses a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references If the template is configured to have numeric control a target address and input expression must be entered Failure to include this information will result in a Watchdog Time out error when the template is selected online Chapter 10 Templates 10 27 Password Protection Allows you to lock out access to numeric entry unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit The selections are listed below None Keyswitch Only Keyswitch and Password A Keyswitch and Password B Keyswitch and Password A or B Password A Only Password B Only Password A or B Password protection must be validated each time the template is selected for numeric entry The template will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to th
183. et Interface Drop dialog box are described below Port Displays the I O port that was selected in the Port field in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box Drop Setting Allows you to simulate the thumbwheel switches on the faceplate of a Network module and is the first of a number of consecutive drop numbers that the DCSNet Express Module will simulate The selectable range of Drop Setting numbers is 1 55 If the Drop Setting field is not edited the value will be initialized to 1 Drop Depth Allows you to define the number of consecutive drops that the DCSNet Express Module will simulate The selectable range of Drop Depth numbers will be based on the value in the Drop Setting field The Drop Depth cannot make the last drop number greater than 55 For example if the Drop Setting field has been set to 24 the Drop Depth field will allow values between and 31 If the Drop Depth field is not edited the value will be initialized to 1 Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 15 DeviceNet Setup To configure the DeviceNet Setup dialog box the following steps must be completed 1 The I O port must be selected and DeviceNet must be selected in the Device Use field in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box 2 Click the DeviceNet button and the DeviceNet Setup dialog box will appear The DeviceNet Setup dialog box is shown below DeviceNet Setup Fa NHode Message Type Table Label HACID Message Type Length Scanner ABSCE Label S
184. et Switching Label Category to Edit Touchscreen Control Keys User Online Label Standard Online Label Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Touchscreen Control Keys is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels DEL gt gt lt lt SPACE SEL CLEAR MORE DIR ENTER RSEL ALARM ACCPT PREV NEXT RETRN Chapter 9 System Online Labels 9 17 9 18 Configuration Editor User s Guide Templates In this chapter you will learn About the Indicator Template About the Readout Template About the Bar Template About the Table Template About the Bar Trend Template About the Line Trend Template About the Display Template Chapter 10 Templates 10 1 10 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Indicator Template Indicator Templates are designed to be used as the lights and buttons of a control panel and are used to indicate the status of devices and to control them e g by turning them on or off The Indicator Template consists of three tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Tab e Indicator Template Indicator States Tab e Indicator Template Control De
185. ew Displays the selected symbol in the Preview box if the Show Preview box is selected Show Preview Allows the selected symbol to be shown in the Preview box Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 43 Bitmap Tool The Bitmap tool allows you to place a bitmap object picture on the page When this tool is selected and you click a configuration page a standard Open Bitmap File dialog box will appear Bitmaps are used for backgrounds or other objects it is not easy or convenient to draw Bitmaps reside in disk files having a BMP extension Graphics can be pasted from other software packages onto a configuration page Refer to the Using Graphics from Other Software topic for more information Tip Bitmaps use a lot of memory The larger the bitmap the more memory is consumed Open Bitmap File When you select the Bitmap tool from the tool palette and click on a configuration page the Open Bitmap File dialog box will appear Open Bitmap File File name Folders bm cLormcontighonline ctg oc E gt PMCONFIG zE E gt ONLINE P E gt CFG Cancel Network E List files of type Drives Bitmap Files E c CMS The Open Bitmap File dialog box will allow you to select the bitmap you wish to use 2 44 Configuration Editor User s Guide Indicator Template Tool The Indicator Template tool allows you to place an Indicator Template on the page Indicator Templates are the lights and buttons of a control pa
186. ffline mode If the Fault Relay De energize on Alarm box is not selected the fault relay will only de energize when a communication error or system error occurs when power is lost or when the PanelMate unit is put into offline mode If the Fault Relay De energize On Alarm box is selected the Bit Zero After Com Fault box must be disabled Chapter 6 System Parameters 6 11 System Parameters Remote Tab The System Parameters Remote Tab dialog box is shown below System Parameters E4 General Paszzword Communications I Remote Alarm Acknowledge Bit Pr si Page Change Register to PLC l from PLC E Remote Silence Alarm Horn Bit to PLE J fomPLC J fom PLE CY Remote Sending of Passwords Password A E Password B mi Hardware Selection al Remote Enable Fault Relay Bit to PLC Reset Clock to c E 00 00 00 Bit Remote Mode from PLC Change Hever The fields in the System Parameters Remote Tab dialog box are described below Note Bit references are used in the System Parameters Remote Tab dialog box fields If you have an associated csv file for tags and have tags assigned for these references you can access your tag names and references by using the l button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Remote Alar
187. finition Type EN orally Open Momentary Reference LULUL N The fields in the Variable Sized Control Button Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Type Allows you to select the type of control definition The selections are described below Normally Open Momentary Defines the PLC bit reference to be set to 1 when the corresponding control button is pressed When the control button is released the PLC bit reference will be set to 0 Normally Close Momentary Defines the PLC bit reference to be set to 0 when the corresponding control button is pressed When the control button is released the PLC bit reference will be set to 1 Normally Open Maintained Defines the PLC bit reference to be set to 1 when the corresponding control button is pressed When the control button is released there is no action Normally Close Maintained Defines the PLC bit reference to be set to 0 when the corresponding control button is pressed When the control button is released there is no action Toggle Defines the PLC bit reference to be set to the inverse of the last setting when the corresponding control button is pressed Page Change Determines the page to be displayed when the page number is calculated in the Expression field Note that the Expression field appears on the Variable Sized Control Button Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box when Page Change is selected in the Type field Reference o
188. finitions Tab Chapter 10 Templates 10 3 Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Tab The Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Indicator States Control Definitions Device Hame T emplate Size in Cells Height 1 width Indicator Label Font Refresh Affected Graphics Onli elie ecte rapnics Uniine Normal gt Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression O The fields in the Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Device Name Allows you to enter a device name The device name will display in the upper area of the template in the normal font You may press the Return key to insert a carriage return The Device Name field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Device Name check the Device Names box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box Note that the name used in the Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 22 characters for the Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Device Name field allows you to enter more than 22 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Template Size In Cells Height Displays the height of th
189. from other window based packages such as CorelDraw and AutoCad and paste the graphics into the Configuration Software using the Windows clipboard The graphic will be converted to a bitmap or PowerGraphic Once the graphic has been inserted you can make it a symbol The other application must be able to output to the Windows clipboard in a Windows bitmap or metafile format Editing Graphics In this chapter you will learn e About editing graphics Appendix E Editing Graphics E 1 E 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Editing Graphics You can use the keyboard keys to move resize or select objects The following lists some suggestions for using the keyboard keys The Arrow keys will move the selected object s one pixel The SHIFT key with the Arrow keys will move the selected object s five pixels The CTRL key with the Arrow keys will re size the selected object s one pixel The CTRL and SHIFT keys with the Right Arrow and Down Arrow keys will re size the selected object s five pixels The object is re sized proportionately in both axes The TAB key will select the next object that was created on a page The SHIFT and TAB keys will select the previous object that was created on a page The F2 key will open the Object Properties dialog box when the object is selected Keyboard keys used to select resize move select next or select previous objects will not function on a configuration page when another windo
190. g address of the ASCII characters within the Message Expression field followed by the format specifier ASC which then is followed by the number of characters to be displayed When the PanelMate unit recognizes an ASCII format specifier ASC in the message expression the PanelMate unit will display the ASCII string from the PLC Optionally a byte swap format specifier BSW can be added to swap the order of character presentation on a word by word basis The following table shows a block of generic PLC registers and the decimal hex and ASCII values for the registers Decimal Hex ASCII Registers Value Value Value 100 16706 4142 AB 101 17220 4344 CD 102 17734 4546 EF 103 18248 4748 GH 104 18762 494A IJ 105 19276 4B4C KL 106 19790 4D4E MN 107 20304 4F50 OP 108 20818 5152 QR 109 21332 5354 ST If the following expressions are entered in the Message Expression field the string will be displayed as shown below Message Expression Displayed String 100 ASC20 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 100 BSW ASC20 BADCFEHGJILKNMPORQTS 105 ASC7 KLMNOPQ LOS BSW ASC7 LKNMPOR ASCII registers displayed in this manner will appear in normal font with white foreground and black background These display attributes font size foreground color and background color may be changed by defining them in the first two words of the string The most significant byte of the first word must contain a 1 This will signal the PanelMate unit that the attributes are t
191. g box When converting to a PanelMate Power Series 1500 configuration note the following items e If your configuration has PowerGraphics the graphics cannot be converted unless the PanelMate Power Series 1500 has the PowerGraphics option installed e If your configuration exceeds the capacity of the standard PanelMate Power Series 1500 but does not exceed the capacity of the expanded PanelMate Power Series 1500 the Capacity Expansion Kit option will be selected in the New Configuration dialog box for the converted configuration e If your configuration exceeds the capacity of the expanded PanelMate Power Series an error message will be displayed and the configuration will not be converted Refer to the Product Features topic for more information about the Capacity Expansion Kit 2 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide Verify Application When you select a configuration filename in the Database Treeview Window and choose the Verify selection from the File Menu the Verify Application dialog box will appear Yerty Application Configuration One The application verified without errors The Verify selection checks all PLC references and expressions in all configured dialog boxes and lists all invalid or illegal PLC references and expressions which would prevent a valid export Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 11 Import When you choose the Import selection from the File Menu the Import dialog box will appear File Hame
192. gned to replace TCAM timer counter access module and RAP register access panel devices that are typically used during the setup and troubleshooting of PLCs Allow On Page Allows you to determine if the Maintenance Template will display on the current page Enable Writes Allows you to determine if the operator can change the data or just monitor it If this box is checked the data is read write otherwise the data is read only Aa CAUTION Make your selection based on the expertise of operators and maintenance personnel Chapter 3 Database Treeview Window 3 7 Protection Allows you to select a type of protection for displaying Maintenance Templates on the current page The selections are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswitch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B The Maintenance Template will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option which may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC For additional information about Maintenance Templates see
193. h of the deadband The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value that must be crossed before Value is considered to have returned to normal status go out of alarm The deadband range prevents multiple alarm messages from being generated when Value is hovering around an alarm threshold Alarm Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is selected the operator must acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm message will be automatically removed from the list when the alarm condition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 23 Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab The Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Vanable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Control Type Hone i The fields in the Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Type Allows you to define the control type used for the template The selections are described below None Allows the template to show a value that the operator cannot control Buttons Requires the operat
194. have a or symbol there are no additional levels The buttons on the Database Treeview Window are described below New Opens the New Configuration dialog box or the New Configuration Page dialog box depending on which icon is selected If you have the Configurations icon a PanelMate model icon or a configuration name icon selected and click the New button the New Configuration dialog box will appear If you have the Configurations Pages icon selected and click the New button the New Configuration Page dialog box will appear Open Opens or expands the currently selected icon in the database tree For example if you select a configuration page name and click the Open button the configuration page will open If you select the Symbol Library icon and click the Open button the symbol names if configured will appear You must select the symbol name and click the Open button to view the Symbol Library dialog box Delete Allows you to delete a selected configuration or a selected configuration page Properties Opens the Configuration Properties dialog box or the Page Properties dialog box depending on which icon is selected If you have a configuration name selected and press the Properties button the Configuration Properties dialog box will appear If a configuration page is selected and press the Properties button the Page Properties dialog box will appear Chapter 3 Database Treeview Window 3 3 New Configuration
195. he csv file can now be use to convert your configuration s references to tags See References to Tag Replacement Operations for more information X Microsoft Excel Sorter2 cs File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Ose 6RY BAT o BS TAN Kk arial 7 BZUEZZ E 8 8 9 3 Device Name PLC1 4 Total Tags 27 6 Tag Name Reference 7 B position 1 NMD 01 8 B position 2 M1 9 B position 3 M12 07 10 Cony 12 Run M12 09 11 Cony 12 Stop M13 00 12 Conv 12 Reverse M1301 13 Cdater ON M13 05 Cdator OFF M13 05 A Convert duplicate references to Tag Names Appendix A Conditional Expression Operators A 1 Conditional Expression Operators In this chapter you will learn e About the Conditional Expression Operators A 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Conditional Expression Operators The operators are listed in order of precedence Level 1 has the highest precedence and level 14 has the lowest precedence All operators on the same level are evaluated left to right You can use parentheses to change the order of operation For more information on the conditional expressions refer to the Conditional Expression Examples topic No Operator 1 sqr 1 log 1 sin 1 tan 1 acos 2 4 KK 5 6 7 gt gt 8 lt 8 gt 9 10 amp 12 14 Il Note the following items Description Square root Base 10 log Sine
196. he Indicator Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Indicator Label check the Indicator Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box 10 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Alarm Alarm Allows you to designate any line of the template definition as an alarm state If the Alarm box is selected and the conditional expression evaluates to be true an alarm message will be placed in the alarm list and sent to the printer if one is configured If the Alarm box is selected the condition associated with the alarm will be monitored at all times regardless of the page being displayed Judicious use of the alarm state is recommended to maximize the response time of the PanelMate unit Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Acknowledge box is selected the operator must acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm message will be automatically removed from the list when the alarm con
197. he Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression If Value 1 is less than the Low Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the bar will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units ALARM will appear on the template below the Device Name in medium foreground intensity on blinking high intensity background A Low Alarm bar is shown in high intensity to the right of the Value 1 bar e For PanelMate Color units ALARM will appear on the template below the Device Name in white on blinking red A Low Alarm bar is shown in red to the right of the Value 1 bar The Low Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank Chapter 10 Templates 10 23 If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Max Calibra
198. he Low Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical and Boolean expressions may be used including multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Deadband Range Allows you to enter a number between 0 99 that will represent the percentage of the high alarm value minus the low alarm value that defines the width of the deadband The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value that must be crossed before Value is considered to have returned to normal status go out of alarm The deadband range prevents multiple alarm messages from being generated when Value is hovering around an alarm threshold Chapter 10 Templates 10 13 Alarm Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledg
199. he PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic The fields in the Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control are described below Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control button labels and the associated PLC Bit Reference Line corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all control buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at that location Control Label Allows you to enter the control button label The Control Label field accepts three lines of normal size alphanumeric characters Use spaces or a carriage return to move the text to the desired location Note that on the configuration page the text displayed in the control button will be truncated but when in Run Mode the text will automatically wrap to the next line If the text wraps to the next line you can eliminate a carriage return in some cases The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display
200. he name used in the Alarm Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 25 characters for the Alarm Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Alarm Device Name field allows you to enter more than 25 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 9 Colors Bar Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the template The Bar button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Erase Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the template The Erase button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the variable sized template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Direction Allows you to determine which direction the dynamic portion of the bar will move The selections are Up Down Left and Right Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Variable Sized Bar Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note th
201. he template will be blank Global Message Allows you to determine if the Variable Sized Display Template will be a global message To make a Variable Sized Display Template global select the Global Message box The selection allows the PanelMate unit to monitor other Variable Sized Display Templates not on the page being displayed in Run Mode Normally the PanelMate unit only monitors the Variable Sized Display Templates on the currently visible page in Run Mode Templates on other pages are referred to as global templates Any Global Message triggered during online operation will be sent to the printer if they have destination settings of Printer or Both Global Messages are not sent to the screen if the page where they were configured is not visible Global Messages only print when the Message Expression changes not when the embedded references change When you change to a page with Global messages the Global Message will not print If a hard coded value e g 100 is placed in the Message Expression the Global Message will print only once at bootup lt Message Library gt Opens the Message Library dialog box Refer to the Message Library topic for more information Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 35 Variable Sized Display Template Control Definitions Tab The Variable Sized Display Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Yanable Sized Display Template WS Display Attributes Position
202. hem by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the template is configured to have numeric control a target address and input expression must be entered Failure to include this information will result in a Watchdog Time out error when the template is selected online Password Protection Allows you to lock out access to numeric entry unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit The selections are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswitch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B Password protection must be validated each time the template is selected for numeric entry The template will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC Chapter 10 Templates 10 45 Line Trend Template Note that the Advanced Trending option must installed in the P
203. hite and no blinking red will be shown The High Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 11 If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Low Alarm Allows you to enter a Low Alarm Expression The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression If Value is less than the Low Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the bar colors will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units the variable sized template is displayed with medium intensity characters on a blinking high intensity background e For PanelMate Color units the variable sized template is displayed in white with a blinking red background Note that if the low alarm value
204. hown below Yanable Sized Bar Template VS Bar Attributes Control Definitions Control Indicator Position Ler Display Always Input Value Expression L J Target Word Address L Password Protection Hone Control Type eee The fields in the Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control are described below Control Indicator Position Allows you to select the position inside of the Variable Sized Bar Template for control indicator arrow The selections are listed below Left Below Right Above Display Allows you to determine if the arrow will always be visible or visible only when the template is selected The selections are Always and On Selection 11 16 Configuration Editor User s Guide Input Value Expression Allows you to enter any mathematical expression that must be performed on the operator s input before the number is stored in the PLC A question mark inside brackets 7 is used to designate the operator input The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags
205. hree tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Variable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Tab e Variable Sized Readout Template Expressions Tab e Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 19 Variable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Tab The Variable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Yanable Sized Readout Template E4 ws Readout Attributes Control Definitians Pixel Location Template Size in Characters A in To 259 E Height 1 width Alarm Device Name Colors GC Font Direction Decimal Places Refresh Affected Normal Horizontal fo a Graphics Online Visibility Expression L J Enable Conditional Visibililga C t x i The fields in the Variable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Pixel Location X Allows you to enter the X location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Readout Template Y Allows you to enter the Y location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Readout Template Template Size In Characters Height Displays the height of the Variable Sized Readout Template as 1 This value cannot be changed Width Allows you to enter the width of the Variable Sized Readout Template Note that you can also re size the width of the template by dragging the middle
206. ibutes Indicator Label Conditional Expression x Conditional Expression E x Indicator Label Alarm i Fu Alarm Bu lt Acknowledge Expression Field Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Control Label Indicator States Control Definitions Reference Field 1 Control Label BA PLC Bit Fg Reference field An example of an expression and reference field is shown below You can access your tag names and references by doing any of the following e Fnter a left bracket e Enter a comma after entering the PLC device name Click on the l button If you enter a left bracket or the PLC device name and a comma a drop down list will appear shown below You can enter the tag information to the expression or reference field by double clicking on the desired tag in the list Or you can manually enter the tag if desired Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Control Definitions Control Label PLC Bit Reference 1 Control Label k e ay Bit fF Jj x Fa elerence I BELT RUN Bg BELT STOP CONS CLOSE CONS OPEN Help When you double click the E button associated with any reference or expression field the Expression Edit dialog box will appear Chapter 12 Using Tags 12 7 The Expresion Edit dialog box allows you to Select tags Construct expresions See where tags are used in your configuration The Ex
207. ic 8 8 Configuration Editor User s Guide General Format Examples If the message is Current tank level is 13 123 gallons and the value in register 123 is 567 the online message will be Current tank level is 567 gallons If the message is Production rate per press is D5 456 17 units per hr and the value in register 456 is 7890 the online message will be Production rate per press is 464 1 units per hr If the message is Part name in line 1 is A 200 U16 and the value in register 200 is 16693 the online message will be Part name in line 1 is A5 Note that with the U16 format the PanelMate unit can read and display the ASCII equivalent of 16693 Chapter 8 Message Library 8 9 Decimal Based Formats The decimal based format types are 1 Integer 2 Floating decimal point real value 3 Fixed decimal point real value 4 Exponential All the decimal based numeric formats are right justified and padded with leading blanks if necessary If a value for a decimal format has too many digits for the specified format size a string of s is displayed for the value Decimal Place Formats For the fixed decimal point format F the number for the total width of the formatted value w must be at least one greater than the number of decimal places d If negative values will be displayed w must be at least two greater than d For th
208. ice Use field select OPC Server PLC Name and Port Table x Port Parameters Port Device Use Local ID 1 OPC Server ee 2 No Usage 1 0 Unequipped No interface board Port Settings Unsolicited Device Device Use Local ID OPC Server 0 r PLC Name Parameters Item Name Port Model Remote Tag File Path amp Name D 2 lt New entry gt Name ple1 Modet z OPC Setup Tag File Port fi z Remote ID fo PARE pict Le Note The OPC Server can be configured on any port that is not being used The port assignment is unrelated to the physical connection between the OPC Server and the PLC or device to which the OPC Server communicates 3 In the Name field enter the device name In this example the name is plc1 4 Click on the Add button The device s name will appear in the PLC Name Parameters window 5 Select the device in the PLC Name Parameters window The OPC Setup button will appear Click on the button to open the OPC Server Setup for Device dialog box The example dialog box below represents a potential setup for a PLC device Note that the format for determining an access path is server dependent and may be different than the example shown OPC Server Setup For Device plc1 Ea Server Name SST CNIOOpcS v 1 Access Path Name 7 20 Configuration Editor User s Guide Note As you configure each device and add it into the PLC Name Para
209. ick the Find Next button to find the next occurrence of the text string or press the Cancel button to close the Find dialog box The Find and Replace functions start searching from the selected line in the Msg Message Destination box lt Replace gt Opens the Replace dialog box In the Replace dialog box enter the text string you wish to search for in the Find What field enter the replacement text string in the Replace With field and then choose the Match Whole Word or Match Case selections if either or both selections apply Once you have entered the text strings you may click the Find Next button to find the next occurrence of the text string click the Replace button to the replace the text string click the Replace All button to replace all occurrences of the text string or press the Cancel button to close the Replace dialog box Chapter 8 Message Library 8 5 Register References within Messages Within the PanelMate unit you can reference PLC register locations within a message to display the numeric register content within the message while in Run Mode You may use the following format to display the contents of the registers tw d expression The following items need to be noted when putting register references in messages e Ifa value is too large to display in the specified format width a string of Xs XXXXX is displayed for the value For example if a message is defined as three characters but the value from the PLC is
210. ill appear in the PLC Name Parameters window 4 Select the connection in the PLC Name Parameters window The DDE Setup button will appear Click on the button to open the DDE Server Setup for Device dialog box Server Name PO Topic Name PO Start Server Command Po DDE Execute Command Po Validation Time Out Value second o 5 Inthe Server Name field enter the name of the program e g Excel Each DDE server has only one server name 6 Topic Name field All DDE servers support at least one topic 7 22 Configuration Editor User s Guide Start Server Command field This command is the pathname of the DDE server application if it is not already running This field may be a blank line which means that an attempt is not made to start the DDE server application if it is not already running It is important to note that a line full of white spaces does not constitute a blank line The white spaces will be sent to the DDE server application to be started which will result in an error DDE Execute field This command is sent to the DDE server after a conversation has been initiated with the DDE server This conversation only occurs one time at PanelMate PC startup This field may be a blank line which means that a DDE execute command is not sent to the DDE server It is important to note that a line full of white spaces does not constitute a blank line The white spaces will be sent to the DDE server application to be started whi
211. in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference for the control button This field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button You cannot use expressions or conditional logic If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 10 60 Configuration Editor User s Guide Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 1 Variable Sized Templates In this chapter you will learn About the Variable Sized Indicator Template About the Variable Sized Bar Template About the Variable Sized Readout Template About the Variable Sized Display Template About the Variable Sized Graphic Template About the Variable Sized Control Button Template 11 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Indicator Template Variable Sized Indicator Templates pro
212. in the Standard Capacity environment Refer to the table below for feature limits Maximum Maximum Number of Number of Product Type Pages Messages PanelMate Power Series 1500 50 2500 All other PanelMate Power Series models 100 5000 PanelMate PC 100 10000 Note that the complexity of the configuration may reduce the number of pages and messages in the PanelMate unit Advanced Trending Template Allows you to configure Advanced Trending Templates which display a history of a reference s value over a period of time Advanced trending features 6 pens that can be triggered by time or event For information on configuring an Advanced Trending Template refer to the Line Trend Template topic Allen Bradley DH 485 Allows you to communicate to the Allen Bradley Data Highway Modicon Modbus Allows you to communicate to Modicon PLCs via the Modicon Modbus or Modicon Modbus Plus Dynamic Graphics Allows symbols to change colors and shapes dynamically on PanelMate Power Series 1500 models 256 Greyscale Color Model 1555 1575 Enhances the PanelMate Power Series 1500 If you have a PanelMate Power Series 1500 Model 1555 and you select the 256 Greyscale Color feature you will have 16 shades of gray instead of the standard 8 shades PowerAnimation and PowerBlink If you have a PanelMate Power Series 1500 Model 1575 and you select the 256 Greyscale Color feature you will have a 256 color palette instead of the standard 16 colors Po
213. ine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Cleaning Mode e Calibrate Touchscreen Chapter 9 System Online Labels 9 15 System Online Labels Touchscreen Keypad Entry Labels When Touchscreen Keypad Entry Labels is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Options __ r Preview Startup Labels Standard jG 2 Allow Label Set Switching Enter New Peterencre Label Category to Edit Touchscreen Keypad Entry Labels User Online Label Standard Online Label Enter New Reference Enter New PLE Name Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Enter New Reference e Enter New PLC Name 9 16 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Online Labels Touchscreen Control Keys When Touchscreen Control Keys is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Options _ r Preview Startup Labels Standard Allow Label S
214. ing the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Units Allows you to define the type of units that will be displayed to the operator such as Deg F or gals The Units field accepts alphanumeric characters Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Bar Trend Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the V
215. ion are set to zero 0 e Group attributes are not exported If a configuration had groups prior to export the imported configuration would show all objects ungrouped e The displayed states for Indicator Variable Sized Indicator and Variable Sized Graphic Templates are not exported On import the selected state of Variable Sized Indicators is set to state one 1 and Indicator Templates and Variable Sized Graphic Templates are set to state five 5 An alternate method for copying configurations from one system to another is by copying all database files to a new database directory on the target system Shareware zip and unzip utilities are available to easily do this via floppy disk This method will retain all Configuration Editor information including test messages groups and indicator selections 2 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide Export Tip If you wish to export to an earlier PanelMate Power Series configuration file or to a PanelMate Series V2 1X configuration file refer to the Export As topic for more information Note that configuration files must be exported before being transferred to the PanelMate unit When you select a configuration filename in the Database Treeview Window and choose the Export selection from the File Menu the Export dialog box will appear kW Export Fi File Hame Directories Epps c 4pmconfigitonlinecfg k mF oo cA gt PHCONFIG gt ONLINE f CFG List Files of Type D
216. ional 2 11 Options Graphics Option You can check the Graphics Option box to set the graphics option in the V2 1 X configuration file If the Graphics Option box is not checked the variable sized graphics and symbols will not be exported After the V2 11 Options dialog box appears the configuration file will be verified and the results of the verification will be displayed in the Verification Status dialog box Refer to the Verification Status topic for more information For more information about the verification process for exporting see the V2 1X Export Guidelines topic or the V2 1X Export Errors topic Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 15 Verification Status If you choose to export to a V2 1X configuration file in the Export As dialog box the configuration file will be verified and then the Verification Status dialog box will appear k W2 11 Verification Status lx PanelMate 2 11 Configuration Options Page Option Graphics Option P lt Allen Bradley DH 485 Yerhication Results 5 Indicator Template at 41 144 will not be exported not on character bou x S Bar Template at 133 143 will not be exported not on character bounda 5 Readout Template at 223 143 will not be exported not on character bo 5 Display Template at 379 148 will not be exported not on character boui 5 Graphic Template at 64 264 will not be exported not on character boun 6 errors found Yentication complete 19 errors foun
217. ipping of software upgrades Contact the Software Update Service at 1 800 809 2772 or fax 614 899 4141 Repair and Upgrade Service 614 882 3282 ext 7601 FAX 614 882 3414 Our well equipped Customer Service department is ready to assist you with repairs upgrades and spare parts services If a situation arises where one of these services is needed just call 614 882 3282 x7601 or fax 614 882 3414 Product Ordering Service 614 882 3282 FAX 614 882 6532 Authorized Cutler Hammer distributors may place product orders directly with our Order Processing department by calling 614 882 3282 x406 or faxing 614 882 6532 For information on your local distributor call the Cutler Hammer Tech Line Customer Support Center 1 800 356 1243 Authorized Cutler Hammer distributors and Cutler Hammer sales offices can get assistance for Cutler Hammer standard and component product lines through the Customer Support Center Call the Customer Support Center for the following assistance 1 Stock availability proof of shipment or to place an order 2 Expedite an existing order 3 Product assistance and product price information 4 Product returns other than warranty returns For information on your local distributor or sales office call the Cutler Hammer Tech Line at 1 800 809 2772 Correspondence Address Cutler Hammer P O Box 6166 Westerville OH 43086 6166 Shipping Address Cutler Hammer 173 Heatherdown Drive Westerville OH 43081 Chapte
218. is less than or equal to the Min Calibration the entire bar will be displayed in blinking red and no white will be shown The Low Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the Ls button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Maximum Calibration Allows you to determine the highest point of the bar This value displays on the template This six character text box accepts 6 digits or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the field Minimum Calibration Allows you to determine the lowest point of the bar This value displays on the template This six character text box accepts 6 digits or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the field Deadband Range Allows you to enter a number between 0 99 that will represent the percentage of the high alarm value minus the low alarm
219. isibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 10 Templates 10 37 Bar Trend Template Expressions Tab The Bar Trend Template Expressions Tab dialog box is shown below Bar Template Bar Attributes Expressions Value 1 E Max Calibration 100 00 Value 2 L Min Calibration 0 0000 High Alarm E Deadband fo s gt Range Low Alarm O _ J x Alarm Acknowledge The fields in the Bar Trend Template Expressions Tab dialog box are described below Value 1 Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Bar Trend Template When viewing the Bar Trend Template Value will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units Value 1 is displayed as a no intensity horizontal bar in the center of the template e For PanelMate Color units Value 1 is displayed as a green horizontal bar in the lower center of the template The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parenth
220. isplayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC 10 18 Configuration Editor User s Guide Bar Template Bar Templates are designed to be used as the analog meters and faceplates on a control panel and are used to indicate a value in analog fashion with a bar graph The bar graph can show current value setpoint and high and low alarm levels The current value and setpoint are also displayed digitally The PanelMate unit also provides two ways for the operator to change a PLC value The Bar Template consists of three tabbed dialog boxes that are displayed below e Bar Template Bar Attributes Tab e Bar Template Expressions Tab e Bar Template Control Definitions Tab Chapter 10 Templates 10 19 Bar Template Bar Attributes Tab The Bar Template Bar Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Bar Template Bar Attributes Control Definitions Device Hame Template Size in Cells Height E E Width 1 Visibility Expression PY Enable Conditional Visibility The fields in the Bar Template Bar Attrib
221. item appears on top of a template or graphic on your configuration page the underlying template or graphic will be deleted when the configuration is exported 6 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Parameters Password Tab The System Parameters Password Tab dialog box is shown below System Parameters General Communications Remote Passwords 3 it sx C Password Protection Password A fi Entry into Offline Mode Overwrite Password A None X Allow Password A Change Set Date Time Hone Password B 2 Page Password Timeout Overarite Password B fo a Minutes PX Allow Password B Change The fields in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box are described below Passwords Password A Allows you to enter a numeric password between 0 and 65535 Passwords can be used to limit operator access to pages offline mode date time change and numeric entry from templates The default Password A sent with the demonstration screens 1s 1 Note that passwords above 65535 or passwords with leading zeroes are not supported in Run Mode Overwrite Password A Determines whether Password A already set in the PanelMate online unit will be overwritten when a new configuration is downloaded You may want the operator to learn a pair of passwords that will not change with every new configuration If the Overwrite Password A box is not selected new passwords will be ignored when a new configuration 1s downloa
222. itional columns to add notes or other information however these columns will not recognized or used by the Configuration software They will however be displayed in the Excel spreadsheet An example is shown below gt Microsoft Excel Fill amp Pack Sub xls 1 TAG NAME LO ADDRESS Description Revision By Date 3 Sorter 1 5450 102 Sorter position 1 oo MC 3 1 95 4 Sorter 2 B450 104 sorter position 2 0i JB 317188 5 Sorters B450 106 sorter position 3 OU MC 37188 Belt Run B450 124 start converyor belt forward 03 MC 427 90 6 Belt Stop 6450 120 stop conveyor belt 03 MC o Marg 3 Belt Reverse B40 22 reverse conveyor belt direction 03 MC o M2r rg 11 Cons Open 5450 116 open consolidator 02 JB 3 16 99 12 Cons Close B450 115 close consolidator U2 JB 315 96 Column 1 Column 2 Columns 3 4 5 amp 6 contain additional contains the contains the data that is not recognized or used by Tag Name I O Address the PanelMate Configuration software When you have finished entering all of your tag names and associated I O address references you must save the file as a csv file For easier future modifications you should also consider saving the file as an Excel spreadsheet xls After saving as a csv file you can associate the csv file with your PanelMate configuration using the PLC Name and Port Table see Chapter 7 Chapter 12 Using Tags 12 13 Creating a CSV File From Your PanelMate Configuration If you have a Pa
223. ity Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 10 Templates 10 31 Table Template Table Entries Tab The Table Template Table Entries Tab dialog box is shown below Table Template T able Attributes Value Input Value Target Word Parameters Expression Expression Address Parameters Decimal Places fo al Value Expression Po
224. l Chapter 8 Message Library 8 1 Message Libary In this chapter you will learn e About the Message Library e About Register References within Messages 8 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Message Library Note that all messages to be shown in a Display Template or a Variable Sized Display Template must be defined in the Message Library It is recommended to define the messages in the Message Library before configuring a Display Template or a Variable Sized Display Template When you double click on the Message Library selection in the Database Treeview Window the Message Library dialog box will appear 3 Wide 4 Wide 5 Wide i a test message T 4 5 B T 3 B Message This is a test message 2 Fu Bg Font Normal gt Destination Screen Replace The Message Library dialog box allows you to create new messages and edit or replace existing messages in the Message Library The fields in the Message Library dialog box are described below Preview Displays the currently selected message with the selected colors and font Markings above the Preview box show the maximum message width for 3 wide 4 wide and 5 wide Display Templates These markings indicate where the right edge of the Display Template will display the last character Chapter 8 Message Library 8 3 Msg Message Destination Displays the messages as unformatted text in the Messag
225. l Label Allows you to enter the control button label The Control Label field accepts three lines of normal size alphanumeric characters Use spaces or a carriage return to move the text to the desired location Note that on the configuration page the text displayed in the control button will be truncated but when in Run Mode the text will automatically wrap to the next line If the text wraps to the next line you can eliminate a carriage return in some cases The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference The PLC Bit Reference field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button Expressions or conditional logic cannot be entered If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For mo
226. lected the operator must acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm message will be removed from the list when the alarm condition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured Chart Bg Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the chart The Chart Bg button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Grid Line Setup These controls define a grid that displays on the Line Trend Template Horizontal Lines Allows you to elect the number of horizontal grid lines displayed for the Line Trend Template Vertical Lines Every n Samples Allows you to determine the spacing of the vertical grid lines Color Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the grid lines The Color button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Line Trend Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a
227. llows you to enter a message expression The value of the Message Expression selects which message will be displayed The result of the Message Expression should be a number that represents the number of a message in the Message Library The message will be displayed in the Display Template If the Message Expression results in a number greater than the maximum number allowed in the Message Library or less than O when running online the previously displayed message will be erased If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the message expression results in an invalid equation e g division by a value of zero etc no message displays If a message expression previously resulted in a valid value but in a later scan results in an invalid equation the previously displayed message will be erased To display a message based on a bit multiply the bit reference times the message number to produce the message number For example to display message 25 when bit 127 14 is on enter 127 14 25 in the Message Expression field The message expression can be as simple as a word reference e g 253 or a mathematical expression which solves to a value corresponding to a message number e g 254 12
228. log box password protection will be ignored on initial bootup The page will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option which may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC Maintenance Templates Maintenance Templates are designed to replace TCAM timer counter access module and RAP register access panel devices that are typically used during the setup and troubleshooting of PLCs Allow On Page Determines if the operator can display the pop up Maintenance Template over the current page Enable Writes Determines if the operator can change the data or just monitor data in the Maintenance Template If the Enable Writes box is selected the data is read write If the Enable Writes box is not selected the data is read only AX CAUTION Make your selection based on the expertise of operators and maintenance personnel 3 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide Protection Allows you to select a type of protection for displaying Maintenance Templates on the current page The selections are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswi
229. lt of the Input If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags For example to store a value in register 364 as a signed 16 bit integer use Target Word Address 364 S 16 Note that the example uses a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references If the template is configured to have numeric control a target address and input expression must be entered Failure to include this information will result in a Watchdog Time out error when the template is selected online Units Allows you to define the type of units that will be displayed to the operator such as Deg F or gals The Units field accepts alphanumeric characters Chapter 10 Templates 10 33 Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Templates are designed to collect store and represent data in a manner that provides a historical perspective on how a single data point has changed and that provides some insight on how the data point may behave in the future The Bar Trend Template shows current value setpoint and high and low alarm levels The current value and setpoint display digitally The Bar Trend Template consists of three t
230. m Acknowledge Bit Only bit references are allowed in these boxes Expressions may not be entered If these boxes are left blank the features will be disabled To PLC Allows you to set a bit in the PLC when the Acknowledge All Alarms control button is pressed during Run Mode From PLC Allows you to scan a bit in the PLC and acknowledge all current alarms when the bit is set Remote Silence Alarm Horn Bit Only bit references are allowed in these boxes Expressions may not be entered If these boxes are left blank the features will be disabled To PLC Allows you to set a bit in the PLC when the Silence Alarm Horn button is pressed during Run Mode From PLC Allows you to scan a bit in the PLC and silence the alarm horn when the bit is set 6 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide Remote Enable Fault Relay Bit Only bit references are allowed in these boxes Expressions may not be entered If these boxes are left blank the features will be disabled To PLC Allows you to set a bit in the PLC when the Enable Fault Relay control button is pressed during Run Mode From PLC Allows you to scan a bit in the PLC and enable the fault relay when the bit is set Page Change Register For information on changing pages by pressing a control button refer to the Page Change with Delay Example topic Only register references are allowed in these boxes Expressions may not be entered If these boxes are left blank the features will b
231. m the PLC Note that a value of 0 zero causes the PanelMate unit to continually scan The maximum value is 99 99 seconds For best performance set the delay to the longest interval your application will permit A minimum of 1 0 seconds is recommended Screen Sets the scan delay for page updates while in Run Mode A value of 0 causes the PanelMate unit to update a page as fast as possible The maximum value is 99 99 seconds Alarm Sets the scan delay for updates of all alarms while in Run Mode A value of 0 causes the PanelMate unit to update background alarms as fast as possible The maximum value is 99 99 seconds All PLC references in the System Parameters dialog box will be polled as part of the Alarm Scan Message Sets the scan delay for updates from all register references defined in messages while in Run Mode A value of 0 causes the PanelMate unit to update the register values as fast as possible The maximum value is 99 99 seconds 6 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide Trend Sets the scan delay for updates from the PLC of all register references for Bar Trend Templates and Line Trend Templates while in Run Mode A value of 0 causes the PanelMate unit to update the register values as fast as possible The maximum value is 99 99 seconds Note that the interval evaluated in the Interval Expression field in the Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Tab dialog box or the Line Trend Template Line Trend Attributes
232. mal Places Allows you to determine how the number will be formatted when displayed This field accepts the numbers 0 through 9 Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Readout Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using
233. message displays in Run Mode The Alarm Device Name field allows you to enter more than 25 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of variable sized template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the variable sized template is updated Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Variable Sized Graphic Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the templ
234. message will be automatically removed from the list when the alarm condition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured lt Symbol Library gt Opens the Select Symbol dialog box Refer to the Select Symbol topic for more information 11 42 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Graphic Template Control Definitions Tab The Variable Sized Graphic Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Vanable Sized Graphic Template WS Graphic Attributes WS Graphic States Control Indicator i e4 A Y 264 A AoW Right Display Always Control Label PLC Eit Reference 1 Control Label Fg a a E The Variable Sized Graphic Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box defines the control buttons on your PanelMate unit If a control button is defined a control arrow will display inside the symbol at its origin to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a control button is pressed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to 0 thus providing a momentary input to the PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic The fields in the Variable Sized Graphic Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Indicator Since the default loca
235. meters field you need to define the server name and access path for that device 6 Develop the PanelMate PC Pro configuration pages 7 Export the PanelMate PC Pro configuration When you have completed your configuration it must be exported before you can execute the configuration in the runtime software To export a configuration select the configuration name in the Database Treeview Window and choose the Export selection from the File menu 8 Double click on the PPS file to run the PanelMate PC Pro application You may also create a shortcut to run your PanelMate PC Pro configuration To create a shortcut within Explorer e Right click on the PPS filename and choose Create Shortcut e Right click on the new icon and choose Properties e In the Shortcut Properties dialog box choose the Shortcut Tab e Inthe Target field enter the PMC EXE pathname the PPS configuration filename and the unsecure mode parameter for the runtime software Note that the unsecure mode parameter is entered to allow you to view both the OPC Server and OPC Client applications For an example of an entry in the Target field refer to the line below Gz pmcontig ntonline omewexe opcdemo zpos u Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 21 DDE Client and Server Communications Note DDE communications is only available for PanelMate PC Pro This functionality is not available for other PanelMate Power Series Power Pro products The PanelMate PC
236. mmunications Audio Output __ Page Operator Input Fow Startup Page Number fo a ame Low z Control Bit Reset Delay fo a m ec Inactivity Perods Page Status Line Display Standard 5 Blanking Elster a LIL Enable Host Display Window fo A Hin Automatic Cancel fo n Hin Allow Immediate Page Change Fonts Redefine Quad Font Direct Select Touchscreen Only Redefine Double High Font Flexible Page Layout Enable Extended Fonts The fields in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box are described below Audio Output Operator Input Sets the volume of the audio tones used as feedback for operator inputs Alarms Sets the volume of alarm annunciation Inactivity Periods Screen Blanking Determines the time the PanelMate unit waits without operator input before blanking the screen This function helps prolong the life of the monitor To prevent screen burn the PanelMate unit waits the indicated number of minutes If there is no operator input during this time the PanelMate unit displays a screensaver that shows PanelMate units randomly appearing Any operator input resets the Screen Blanking timer and recalls the previously displayed page The page is also recalled automatically if any template or variable sized template goes into alarm or if an automatic page change occurs Tip If you are creating a PanelMate PC configuration it is recommended that you use the
237. more information about the Maintenance Template topic refer to the Maintenance Template topic in the Online Operation User s Guide The fields in the New Configuration Page dialog box are described below Page Number Allows you to enter the page number for the new configuration page Title Allows you to enter a title for the new configuration page 3 6 Configuration Editor User s Guide Protection Allows you to control access to a page by selecting a type of protection for the new configuration page The selections are listed below Tip None Keyswitch Only Keyswitch and Password A Keyswitch and Password B Keyswitch and Password A or B Password A Only Password B Only Password A or B If a page is password protected but is selected as the startup page in the Startup Page field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box password protection will be ignored on initial bootup The page will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option which may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC Maintenance Templates Maintenance Templates are desi
238. munication parameters may be disabled If one of the choices is disabled refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for the settings The fields in the Port Settings dialog box are described below PORT Displays the port selected in the Port Device Use Local ID box in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box Electrical Allows you to set the type of electrical communication for the port You have three choices RS232 RS422 and 485 Baud Rate Allows you to set the data transfer speed used in communications Data Bits Allows you to set the number of data bits used in communication You can select 5 6 7 and 8 data bits Stop Bits Allows you to set the number of stop bits used in communications You can select 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits Parity Allows you to set the parity type used in communication You can select None Odd or Even Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 7 Unsolicited Device When the Unsolicited Device button is clicked on the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box the Unsolicited Device dialog box will appear Unsolicited Device PORTH 2 Hame PLCI Model PLC5 15 The Unsolicited Device dialog box is used to assign a name and model to an unsolicited device The fields in the Unsolicited Device dialog box are described below PORT Displays the port selected in the Port Device Use Local ID box in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box Name Allows you to define names for each PL
239. n Miscellaneous Text is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Directory of Page Titles e Press Directory for Additional Pages e ALARM PAGE e HOST DISPLAY WINDOW e SETUP PAGE e PAGE e lt NO CONTROL gt e Current Date e Press Page Number Below e Remote Mode Change Requested OK to Proceed System Online Labels Display System Configuration Info When Display System Configuration Info is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Ei Online Options r Preview Startup Labels Standard i Allow Label Set Switching Label Category to Edit User Online Label Standard Online Label USER CONF IGURAT ION EXECUTIVE FIRMARE INSTALLED DRIVERS Name Version Dates T ime Free Bytes Used Bytes Label USER CONFIGURATION Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Display System Configuration Info is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels
240. n configuration file Export As Opens the Export As dialog box This selection will export the selected configuration file from the database to an earlier version configuration file e g V2 1X VCP Transfer Executes the PanelMate Transfer software This selection allows you to transfer configuration files execute firmware and drivers to and from the PanelMate unit Tip Before a configuration file can be transferred to a PanelMate unit the configuration file must be exported Print Opens the Configuration Editor Reports dialog box This selection allows you to print a hard copy of the current configuration For information on printing an image of a configuration page refer to the Printing a Configuration Page topic Exit Ends the PanelMate Configuration Editor session Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 5 Open Database When you choose the Open Database dialog box from the File Menu the Open Database dialog box will appear Open Database Folders c pmcontigsmodel Cancel oc gt PMCONFIG f MODEL Help Network List files of type Drives Database pmconfig dE ES c CMS The Open Database dialog box allows you to select a PanelMate database The default database named model is created during the installation process The model database is actually a group of files located in the model subdirectory under the PanelMate Configuration Editor directory c pmconfig by default Many files over a
241. n in the Question dialog box to review the readme txt file The readme txt file lists all the issues addressed from the previous version of software lists the enhancements to the current version of software and lists the new issues with the current version of software After reviewing the readme txt file press the OK button in the Installation Complete dialog box Chapter 1 Installing the Configuration Software 1 3 Product Features The following product features can be purchased from Cutler Hammer If you have purchased the feature the feature must be selected in the New Configuration dialog box or the Configuration Properties dialog box in the configuration software Note that some features are standard and cannot be disabled Color Display The Color Display Feature allows you to select a color configuration If this box is not checked the configuration will be grayscale High Capacity Unit The High Capacity Unit feature allows you to create a larger number of pages and messages than permitted in the Standard Capacity environment Refer to the table below for feature limits Maximum Maximum Number of Number of Product Type Pages Messages PanelMate Power Series 1500 50 2500 All other PanelMate Power Series models 100 5000 PanelMate PC 100 10000 Note that the complexity of the configuration may reduce the number of pages and messages in the PanelMate unit Advanced Trending Template The Advanced Trending Template featu
242. n to the Expression Edit dialog box Ba Expression Edit Dialog Tags From Tag Name File Tag Cross References Operator Description Parenthesis w Devices Tag Hame Reference i Add BELT REVERSE B458 122 Subtract R458 7124 Multiply B45B7128B z Divide B45B7115 Equal to Bada 116 lt gt Not equal to B45071206 lt Less than x Ie gt Greater than B4A5Ar1 09 Less or equal E45ArKA Greater or equal A E450711A kk Logical AHD B450 182 lI Logical OR C Tog Name SRT POS 3 Basar ag DR bitwise it wise Reference NOT bit wise Edit File By 7 Belt Reverse AOR bit wise 2 B450 122 3 oe ower exp Exponential lt lt Shift left gt y Ghift ririhi Tag Exp Ret Exp Error Edit expression the reference expression and parser error will be displayed under 12 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide Creating a CSV File in Microsoft Excel If you would like to use tags in your PanelMate application but do not have an existing tag database you can develop one using Microsoft Excel spreadsheet software If you are not familiar with Microsoft Excel you may wish to read the Microsoft Excel software user s manual prior to starting your tag database The Configuration software only requires two types of information the Tag Name and the PLC I O Address reference In your Excel spreadsheet designate one column as the tag name and a second column as the I O address You may wish to use add
243. name and a model to an unsolicited device on the I O port that is the only port that accepts unsolicited messages for communication Refer to the Unsolicited Device topic for more information lt Generic gt Displays the Generic Protocol dialog box The Generic button appears when you select Generic Protocol in the Device Use box Refer to the Generic Protocol topic for more information lt DH 485 gt Displays the AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address dialog box The DH 485 button appears when you select DH 485 in the Device Use box Refer to the AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address topic for more information lt Remote I O gt Displays the Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup dialog box The Remote I O button appears when you select Allen Bradley Remote I O in the Device Use box Refer to the Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup topic for more information lt Genius I O gt Displays the Genius I O dialog box The Genius I O button only appears when you select Genius I O in the Device Use box Refer to the GE Fanuc Genius I O dialog box topic for more information lt DCSNet gt Displays the Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop dialog box The DCSNet button appears when you select Reliance DCSNet in the Device Use box Refer to the Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop topic for more information lt DeviceNet gt Displays the DeviceNet Setup dialog box The DeviceNet button appears when you select DeviceNet in the Device Use box Refer to the DeviceNet Setup topic for mor
244. nce To Tag Replacement Operations A reference to tag replacement operation is performed when a user wants to replace an existing I O address with a tag name This operation is especially useful when importing a pps file into the PanelMate database Because pps files do not contain tag references the imported configuration will only contain I O references By associating a csv file with the imported configuration the user can replace all of the I O references with the corresponding tag names When performing a reference to tag replacement operation the Configuration software searches the I O Address Field of the cvs file If the I O address is found in the I O Address Field the corresponding tag name will replace the I O address throughout the configuration If the I O address is not found in the csv file the Tag Name Column is searched to verify that the tag exists in the csv file Tags that are not found in either the I O Address Field or the Tag Name Column are listed in pop up dialog box allowing you to resolve the status of the unknown I O address CAUTION Prior to performing a reference to tag operation confirm that your csv file does not contain any duplicate tag name same tag name different I O address Duplicate tag names WILL NOT be replaced during reference to tag operations Note When the Configuration software searches for an I O address in a csv file the search is case insensitive If there is more than one tag name
245. nd fill color or shade You can choose Colors on color units only Blinking colors on color systems only Shades of gray Blinking shades of gray Note the following Color Palette items You can move the Color Selection Palette by clicking the left mouse button and dragging the palette to the desired position on the screen The Color Selection Palette will then have a small title and icon that will indicate whether it is the Pen Color or Fill Color palette If the 256 Greyscale Color option is installed on the PanelMate Power Series 1500 additional colors or shades of gray will be available In order for the color palette to accurately represent the color and blink characteristics of the PanelMate online unit the video driver selected from the Windows Control Panel must be a 256 color driver If the video driver is not a 256 color driver either 16 color or more than 256 color the color palette shown in the Configuration Editor will not match that of the online unit The black color displayed in row 1 column 1 and row 3 column 1 are colors selected to be compatible with PanelMate versions prior to the PanelMate Power Series If these colors are selected then the number of characters displayed in a 1 cell template will be reduced from 12 to 10 2 38 Configuration Editor User s Guide Status Bar When the Status Bar selection is checked under the View Menu the Status Bar will appear on the Main Screen For Help pre
246. nd time The selections are listed below None Keyswitch Only Keyswitch and Password A Keyswitch and Password B Keyswitch and Password A or B Password A Only Password B Only Password A or B The page will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the Password A and Password B fields The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC Page Password Timeout Allows the password to be valid for a defined number of minutes before timing out Note that a value of 0 zero indicates that there is no timeout period Chapter 6 System Parameters 6 9 System Parameters Communications Tab The System Parameters Communications Tab dialog box is shown below System Parameters Scan Delays in Seconds Screen 0 00 a X Retry Delay Bit Zero After Com Fault Alarm 0 00 a f Fault Relay Deenergize on Alarm Message 0 00 a Trend 0 00 a The fields in the System Parameters Communications Tab dialog box are described below Scan Delay In Seconds Scan delay is the amount of time the PanelMate unit will wait upon receiving data from the PLC before the it requests another update fro
247. ndicates this rack is reserved See the Active Rack Example Note that when using a PLC 2 30 if the PanelMate unit is configured as active groups within a rack other than the highest group then the PLC will not scan for any groups higher than those the PanelMate unit is simulating physical groups or groups simulated on another AcceleratI On board To avoid this situation make the PanelMate unit the highest active group within a rack and only configure one PanelMate unit active on any one rack Block Transfer Addressing Allows you to define the word offset base in all monitored and active Block Transfers as OCTAL or DECIMAL The default is octal The Block Transfer Addressing field only applies to the word offset Bits within the words are addressed as octal 0 7 and 10 17 Active Block Transfer Table Allows you to configure active block transfers between the PanelMate unit and a PLC You may define up to 16 active block transfers A through P each with up to 64 words Direction This column defines the direction of the block transfer The available selections are NONE READ WRITE COMMON and PASS THROUGH NONE indicates that there will not be a transfer Note that when NONE is selected the other boxes in this group are disabled READ allows the PLC to read a block of data from the PanelMate unit WRITE allows the PLC to write a block of data to the PanelMate unit COMMON allows the PLC to read data from and write data to the Panel
248. nel They indicate and control the status of devices by turning them on or off Refer to the Indicator Template topic for more information Readout Template Tool The Readout Template tool allows you to place a Readout Template on the page Readout Templates are designed to replace numeric and digital readout devices found on a conventional control panel and to supply the functionality often provided by CRT based devices Refer to the Readout Template topic for more information Bar Template Tool The Bar Template tool allows you to place a Bar Template on the page Bar Templates are the analog meters and face plates of a control panel They indicate a value in analog fashion using a bar graph that shows these values in graphical form e Current value e Steeping e High and low alarm levels Refer to the Bar Template topic for more information Bar Trend Template Tool The Bar Trend tool allows you to place a Bar Trend Template on the page Bar Trend Templates collect store and display data to provide a historical perspective on how e A single data point has changed e A data point may behave in the future Refer to the Bar Trend Template topic for more information Table Template Tool The Table Template tool allows you to place a Table Template on the page Table Templates display a table of values and accept numeric entry for all the items in the table Refer to the Table Template topic for more information Line Trend Templat
249. nelMate configuration that was developed without tags you can export your references to a csv file using the PLC Name and Port dialog box Once created you can associate the csv file with a device in your source configuration or any other PanelMate configuration To create a csv file use the following procedure Step 1 Open the PLC name and Port Table and click on the Tag File button PLC Name and Port Table Ea Port Parameters Port Device Use Local ID TATTER Go to the 1 0 Mo Usage PLC Name and Device Use Local ID Port Ta ble Cutler Hammer D50 D300 x P dialog box PLC Name Parameters It N Port Model Remote Tag File Path amp N or r ode emote Tag File Pa ame 2 lt New entry gt Click on Tag File button Name plc1 Model D50 z Default Port 1 gt Remote ID 255 PLC Name plc1 x Step 2 Click on the NEW button in the Tag Name File dialog box Current Selected Tag Name File or f Notepa New Edit s Tag Name Column Reference Column Waw z g Line t Select the Tag Start Line Click on the New button 12 14 Configuration Editor User s Guide Step 3 Choose a file name and path for the csv file in the Create a New Tag Name dialog box Create a New Tag Name File for Device plc 21 x File name Folders OK c pmcontig gt PMCONFIG J CONYVARTDB MODELOOO JJ NTFONTS Save file as type Drives Csv Files cs
250. nential lt lt Shift left yy s hifr ririhr Y Tag Exp Ref Exp Error Edit expression the reference expression and parser error will be displayed under The following steps describe a typical expression construction process Click on the E button associated with any reference or expression field to open the Expression Edit dialog box 2 Double click on the first Tag Name Reference needed for the expression Tag Name Reference il BELT REVERSE B458122 BELT RUN B45B7124 BELT STOF B45h 1248 CONS CLOSE B45B7115 CONS OFEN B45B7115 COUNT 1 B45671206 COUNT 1 RS 456 118 I 2 Tenli P B45 189 B45R 5RR B45B 11B B45B 1B2 B4561 h4 B4561 H6 SURT POS 3 hu 2 B64501277 12 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide 3 4 5 6 For more information on constructing expressions refer to Appendix A Conditional Expression The Tag Name and Reference will appear in the Tag Exp and Ref Exp fields Tag Exp COUNT 2 Ref Exp IB45071 27 Error Double click on the Operator needed for the expression Uperator Description Parenthesis Add Subtract Multiply Divide Equal to Hot equal to Less than Greater than Less or equal Greater or equal Logical AND Logical DR AND bit wise OR bit wise HOT bit wise SOR bit wise Hodulo Power exp Exponential lt lt Shift left gt gt GC hift rioht x a ki w FFE s h ss w e H IH
251. ng a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information 10 48 Configuration Editor User s Guide Discrete Expression Appears only when the Discrete trigger type is selected The Discrete Expression field allows you to enter an expression so that a trend will be sampled when the result of the expression changes from false to true If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Deadband Range Allows you to enter a number between 0 99 that will represent the percentage of the high alarm value minus the low alarm value that defines the width of the deadband The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value that must be crossed before Value is considered to have returned to normal status go out of alarm The deadband range prevents multiple alarm messages from being generated when Value is hovering around an alarm threshold Alarm Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is se
252. nge a PLC value The Readout Template consists of three tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Readout Template Readout Attributes Tab e Readout Template Expressions Tab e Readout Template Control Definitions Tab Chapter 10 Templates 10 9 Readout Template Readout Attributes Tab The Readout Template Readout Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Readout Template Readout Attributes Control Definitions Device Name Template Size in Cells Height 1 width fi Walue 1 Font Units Decimal Places Refresh Affected Quad jo Graphics Online B Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression The fields in the Readout Template Readout Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Device Name Allows you to enter a device name The device name will display in the upper area of the template in the normal font You may press the Return key to insert a carriage return The Device Name field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Device Name check the Device Names box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box Note that the name used in the Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 22 characters for the Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Device Name field allows you to enter more than 22 characters to allow for control key combinations fo
253. nitored at all times regardless of the page being displayed Judicious use of the alarm state is recommended to maximize the response time of the PanelMate unit Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Acknowledge box is selected the operator must acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm message will be automatically removed from the list when the alarm condition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured Alarm Message Allows you to enter the alarm message that will be displayed on the alarm line when the state goes into alarm and to a printer if one is configured Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 7 Variable Sized Bar Template Variable Sized Bar Templates are designed to replace analog meters and face plates found on a conventional control panel The Variable Sized Bar Templates can also be used along with Symbols or Graphic elements to simulate tank fills pipe flow conveyors and other specific applications They also allow for definition of high and low alarm levels The Variable Sized Bar Template consists of three tabbed dialog boxes which are listed below e Variable Sized Bar Template VS Bar Attributes Tab e Variable Sized Bar Template Expressions Tab e Variable Si
254. nt byte contains the background color The colors are numbered through 255 and can be determined by using the Color Palette in the Configuration Software counting left to right and top to bottom e g black 1 blue 2 green 3 cyan 4 red 5 magenta 6 yellow 7 etc Refer to the examples below Examples If register 98 has a value of 260 Hex 0104 and register 99 has a value of 1287 hex 0507 then the message 98 ASC6 would display the string ABCDEF in Quad font with red characters on yellow background If the byte swap format is used then the bytes of the first two words need to be swapped Register 98 will have a value of 1025 hex 0401 and register 99 will have a value of 1797 Hex 0705 The message 98 BSW ASC6 would then display the string BADCFE in Quad font with yellow characters on a red background Test Message Number Allows you to enter a test message number To view a message on the page during configuration a message number may be entered into the Test Message field The message corresponding to this number will be displayed at the Display Template s origin If there is not a message defined for that number the template will be blank lt Message Library gt Opens the Message Library dialog box Refer to the Message Library topic for more information Chapter 10 Templates 10 59 Display Template Control Definitions Tab The Display Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Displ
255. nt rates Main Screen In this chapter you will learn About the Main Screen About the File Menu selections About the Edit Menu selections About the Object Menu selections About the View Menu selections About the Window Menu selections About the Help Menu selections About the Toolbar selections About the Color Selection Palette About the Status Bar About Tool Palette selections Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 1 2 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Main Screen The Main Screen appears when you run the PanelMate Configuration Editor Panel ate Configuration Editor C PHCONFIGSMODEL Database File Edit Object View Window Help Bee zi ra Configurations H PanelMate 1500 EE PanelMate 1700 E PanelMate 2000 H E PanelMate 3000 E PanelMate 4000 H PanelMate 5000 FEE PanelMate PC For Helg press FDI The Database TreeView Window will appear on the Main Screen For more information about the Database TreeView Window refer to the Database Treeview Window topic File Menu Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 3 The File menu varies depending upon whether the database is open Tip When the database is open the Database Treeview Window will appear If the database is not open the following File Menu will appear View Help Open Database VCP Transter Exit If the database is open the following File Menu will appear Open Database Backup Database Close Dave tes Save As
256. ntrol buttons can be pressed causing bit set and released causing bit clear very quickly some PLC programs need time to sense the bit set command before receiving a bit clear command Page Status Line Display Determines how the Page Status Line is displayed during Run Mode The Page Status Line will display only the pages in alarm in a first in first out FIFO format Tip If you are creating a V2 1 X configuration for a PanelMate unit with 10 pages numbered 0 9 the Standard selection can be selected if you wish to display all page numbers The intensity or color of each number will indicate the status of that page Enable Host Display Window Allows you to enable an extra page that can receive and display data from a host computer The Host Display Window uses the entire 3x5 template display area Data is sent from the host computer via the Generic Protocol Refer to the Generic Protocol Driver Manual for more information about the Host Display Window Note that if you are creating a PanelMate PC configuration do not enable the Host Display Window Allow Immediate Page Change Determines if a PLC can change the displayed page through the Page Change Register field while the PanelMate unit has a template or variable sized template selected If the Allow Immediate Page Change field is selected the page change can occur even if the operator is in the process of entering information If the operator is pressing a control button a
257. o be altered The least significant byte of the first word must contain the font size key 01 Normal 02 Graphic 03 Double High 04 Quad 11 34 Configuration Editor User s Guide The most significant byte of the second word contains the foreground color and the least significant byte contains the background color The colors are numbered through 255 and can be determined by using the Color Palette in the Configuration Software counting left to right and top to bottom e g black 1 blue 2 green 3 cyan 4 red 5 magenta 6 yellow 7 etc Refer to the examples below Examples If register 98 has a value of 260 Hex 0104 and register 99 has a value of 1287 hex 0507 then the message 98 ASC6 would display the string ABCDEF in Quad font with red characters on yellow background If the byte swap format is used then the bytes of the first two words need to be swapped Register 98 will have a value of 1025 hex 0401 and register 99 will have a value of 1797 Hex 0705 The message 98 BSW ASC6 would then display the string BADCFE in Quad font with yellow characters on a red background Test Message Number Allows you to enter a test message number To view a message on the page during configuration a message number may be entered into the Test Message field The message corresponding to this number will be displayed at the Variable Sized Display Template s origin If there is not a message defined for that number t
258. ol Definitions Tab The Line Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Line Trend Template ES Line Trend Attributes Input Value Expression A Target Word Address J Password Protection None The fields in the Line Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Input Value Expression Allows you to enter any mathematical expression that must be performed on the operator s input before the number is stored in the PLC A question mark inside brackets is used to designate the operator input The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as is enter in the field Refer to the examples below 32 5 9 The operator s input is changed from Fahrenheit to Celsius gt 0 lt 100 lt 0 123 gt 100 123 Target Word Address is 123 This expression limits entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register Any value outside this range has no effect on the value in the
259. on An alternative method of achieving the same result would be to use the Message Expression multiplied by the Visibility Expression and then deselect the Enable Conditional Visibility field For example if the Message Expression is 40210 and the Visibility Expression is 10322 then the new Message Expression would be 40210 10322 and Enable Conditional Visibility field would be deselected When the Visibility Expression reference 10322 is false the result would be to display the Message Number 0 which would display nothing Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 11 32 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Display Template Expressions Tab The Variable Sized Display Template Expressions Tab dialog box is shown below Varnable Sized Displa
260. on the page The grid is set up on 8x16 pixel boundaries for character based alignment The Snap To Grid is intended to facilitate development of V2 1X configurations Note that resize does not function on a group if the snap to grid feature is enabled 2 24 Configuration Editor User s Guide Object Menu The Object Menu is shown below eee View Window H Properties F2 faroup Ug Bring to Front Send to Back Align k Distribute k Make Equal Size k Reshape Make simio Make Break somia Objects can be edited using keys on the keyboard For information on editing objects using the keyboard refer to the Editing Graphics topic The selections in the Object Menu are described below Note that some of the selections are available from the toolbar Refer to the toolbar topic for more information Properties Opens the Object Properties dialog box for the selected object Use this selection to edit specific object information You can also use the F2 key as a shortcut key Group Joins selected objects together into a group object The group object is contained within a single bounding rectangle and can be moved resized etc Note that you can group objects lines rectangles etc but you cannot group templates Tip When configurations containing groups are imported the objects within those groups will appear as individual objects and not part of a group Since groups have no function in the online configu
261. or to use control buttons to change a setpoint value If you choose Buttons the dialog box will change Refer to the Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control topic for more information Numeric Requires the operator to enter a setpoint value If you choose Numeric the dialog box will change Refer to the Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control topic for more information Note that if Numeric or Button is selected a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available 11 24 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control The Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control is shown below Yanable Sized Readout Template VS Readout Attributes Control Definitions Control Indicator u 7 7 7 7 7 Position Left Display Always Control Label PLC Bit Reference 1 Control Label Fg Reference Po Bg Control Type erenn The Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control defines the control buttons on your PanelMate unit If a control button is defined a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a control button is pres
262. our configuration An example is shown below X Microsoft Excel Sorter_cs I File Edit wiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Be cA tz MOB wu Els 4 3 EE O A IDM GAY X B m o Arial gt 10 B F U A B C D E F G CSW Tag File Name SORTER CSV 2 PanelMate Configuration 15 TS 33 PPS 3 Device Name PLC1 4 Total Tags 27 5 6 Tag Name Reference Expression Page Position Element Type Expression Type 7 1M13 06 M13 06 m13 06 1 543 161 Variable Sized Control Button PLC bit reference 8 1M13 05 M13 05 13 05 1 415 151 Variable Sized Control Button PLC bit reference 9 M400 M4 00 400 1 420 102 Variable Sized Graphic Conditional 4 expression 10 M15 0D M15 00 115 00 1 414 97 Wariable Sized Control Button PLC bit reference 41 M401 M4 01 44 01 1 493 102 Variable Sized Graphic Conditional 4 expression 12 M4 02 M4 02 M4 02 1 566 102 Variable Sized Graphic Conditional 4 expression 13 M2 04 M2 04 m2 04 1 504 174 Variable Sized Graphic Conditional 4 expression 14 M1501 M15 U1 A t A 4 Button PLC bit g Column 1 Column 2 contains contains Columns 3 and beyond contain Tag Names References PLC cross reference information 12 16 Configuration Editor User s Guide Step 7 The final step is to replace the duplicate references in the Tag Name Column with actual tag names After tag names have been assigned to the references your edits are saved and t
263. ous Soft Key Prompts M User Online Label Standard Online Label Change Online Labels View or Acknowledge A arms Get Fage Directory Scroll Up Scroll Down Acknowledge Selected Alarm Acknowledge A A arms Graphic Double High Quad The System Online Labels dialog box is used to change the labeling for most of the PanelMate unit screens The fields in the System Online Labels dialog box are described below Online Options Startup Labels Allows you to select the Standard or User labels to display at startup If you select Standard the PanelMate unit will display the default label set If you select User the PanelMate unit will display the labels you create in the System Online Labels dialog box Allow Label Set Switching Allows you to switch between the two label sets during online operation if this field is checked If this field is not checked only the labels selected in the Startup Labels field will be displayed Preview Previews the online label you are working on Chapter 9 System Online Labels 9 3 Label Category To Edit Allows you to select the label category you wish to edit When you select a label category the user defined labels will appear in the User Online Label field and the standard labels will appear in the Standard Online Label field The following list shows the label categories that may be edited e Miscellaneous Soft Key Prompts e Maintenance Template Soft Key Prompts e Us
264. pe tool refer to the Reshape Tool topic Text Tool The Text tool allows you to place a text object on the page 2 42 Configuration Editor User s Guide Symbol Tool The Symbol tool allows you to place a symbol object on the page When the Symbol tool is selected from the tool palette and you click on the configuration page the Select Symbol dialog box will appear For more information on the Select Symbol dialog box refer to the Select Symbol topic Note that graphics can be pasted from other software packages onto a configuration page and made into a symbol Refer to the Using Graphics from Other Software topic for more information Select Symbol When you select the Symbol tool or the Variable Sized Graphic Template tool from the tool palette and click on a configuration page the Select Symbol dialog box will appear select Symbol Symbol Hame Symbol riqin Offset SYMBOL3 a TY Preview PX Show Preview The Select Symbol dialog box is used to select an existing symbol to place on a configuration page The fields in the Select Symbol dialog box are described below Symbol Name Displays the lists of symbol names Note that you may scroll through the symbol name list and preview each symbol if the Show Preview box is selected Symbol Origin Offset Displays the symbol s origin offset in pixels X Displays the X origin offset in pixels Y Displays the Y origin offset in pixels Previ
265. pports a number of PLCs which V2 1X does not In the PLC Name And Port Table if no device name is given to a PLC the PLC assumes the default device name If the driver associated with the default name is not supported by V2 1X the default device name will not be exported V2 1X Symbol names can be no longer than six characters Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 19 Configuration Editor Reports When you select a configuration filename in the Database Treeview Window and choose the Print selection from the File Menu or click on the Print button from the toolbar the Configuration Editor Reports dialog box will appear Configuration Editor Reports Contiguration Configuration One Report Type Configuration Details Select All Pages The fields in the Configuration Editor Reports dialog box are described below Report Type Allows you to select the type of report you wish to print lt Report Options gt Opens the Configuration Editor Report Options dialog box This selection allows you to select the report options Pages Allows you to select the pages you wish to print or click the lt Select All Pages gt button lt Select All Pages gt Allows you to select all pages listed in the Pages box for printing lt Print Reports gt Allows you to print the Configuration Report you have configured lt Printer Setup gt Allows you to view the standard Microsoft Windows Print Setup dialog box The options you s
266. pression Edit dialog box can be used in two views Tags From Tag Name File view displays all tags in tag file R Expression Edit Dialog _ x Tags From Tag Hame File Tag Cross References Operator Description Parenthesis Devices Tag Hame Reference E Add BELT REVERSE B45687122 Subtract UN B45a 124 Huiliply B45607126 z Divide B45867115 Equal to B458 7115 lt gt Hot equal to B4587 129 lt Less than ea gt Greater than BARRA lt Less or equal 3 B45G ARR gt Greater or equal 3RS B45B 118 kk Logical AND S POS 1 B450 182 lI Loqical R lz Tag i SORT POS 2 B45607104 j Gee a SORT POS 3 B450 186 it wise C Reference b NOT bit wise Edit File By 7 Belt Reverce OR bit wise 2 B450 122 fe ee al ower exp Exponential lt lt Shift left yy Shift riihf Tag Esp Ret Exp Error Edit expression the reference expression and parser error will be displayed under Tag Cross Reference view only displays tags used in the configuration R Expression Edit Dialog Miel x Tags From Tag Name File Tag Cross References Operator Description Parenthesis Add Subtract Hultiply Divide Equal to Hot equal to Less than Greater than Less or equal Greater or equal Logical AND Logical DR AND bit wise OR bit wise HOT bit wise OR bit wise HModulo Power exp Exponential lt lt Shift left 1 1 Devices Tag Name Reference CONS CLOSE B45687115 B45407126 B
267. r 1 Installing the Configuration Software 1 1 Installing the Configuration Software In this chapter you will learn e How to install the Configuration Software e About the Product Features 1 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Installing the Configuration Software The Software Kit contains a CD ROM for fast easy software installation Select Install Software and then select the software files you wish to install Note Note Note Note Configuration Software files Configuration Database files Transfer Utility files Executive Firmware files PanelMate PC Runtime files Before installing the configuration software make sure that you close all open applications If installing the PanelMate Runtime Software only deselect the other selections and only check the box for the PanelMate PC Runtime selection If you are upgrading your configuration software you do not need to install the Configuration Database files However if you do not deselect this box your existing database will be renamed and a new database will be installed On screen prompts detail available options PanelMate PC default fonts are not automatically installed in the Windows Font directory Follow the installation prompts to install the PanelMate fonts and reboot the PC prior to running PanelMate PC After selecting the directory and subcomponent files to install press the Install button When the installation is finished press the YES butto
268. r Expression Depending upon your selection in the Type field this box will be labeled Reference or Expression The Reference field will be displayed if you select Normally Opened Momentary Normally Closed Momentary Normally Opened Maintained Normally Closed Maintained or Toggle in the Type field The Expression field will be displayed if you select Page Change in the Type field 11 48 Configuration Editor User s Guide The selections are described below Reference Allows you to enter the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button This field accepts alphanumeric characters Expressions or conditional logic cannot be entered Expression Allows you to determine the destination page when the corresponding control button is pressed This field accepts numeric characters Note that brackets are not required If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 12 1 Chapter 12 Using Tags Using Tags In this chapter you will learn Advantages of Using Tags About Tag Database Files How Configuration Software Processes Tag References How to Access Your Tags How to Construct Expressions Using Tags How to Edit Tags How to Create a CSV File 1
269. r failure and left the database in a locked State 2 Change the path to the correct database directory 3 Ensure the path points to a valid database directory 4 Ensure the database path points to a valid database Note that this is updated automatically when the database path is changed within the Configuration Editor 5 Once the other user closes the database you will be able to open it 6 If you are absolutely sure the database is not open on your system or another system from a network connection delete the two lockfiles in the database paradox Ick and pdoxusrs Ick Then re open the database selection does not display all options when a large font video The pull down menu font driver is used Use the arrow keys to view all font selections Appendix F Configuration Editor Problems F 3 Fault occurs during an export of a configuration containing The error General Protection bitmaps Incompatibility with the video driver Replace the video driver with a standard Windows VGA driver and re export occurred while reading database appears in the Configuration Software while trying to export a The error File exception configuration Insufficient disk space Ensure there is sufficient disk space where the Temp directory or folder is located Colors or blinks shown in the editor do not match those shown in the online unit 1 Switching between Window
270. r the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Template Size In Cells Height Displays the height of the Readout Template as 1 This value cannot be changed Width Allows you to enter the width of the Readout Template as 1 or 2 Value 1 Font Allows you to select the font for the characters used in the status lower area of the Readout Template The selections are Normal Double High or Quad For maximum readability choose the largest size that fits in the template Note that redefining the Double High or Quad fonts limits your character size choices The maximum number of digits for a Readout Template is based upon the combination of template size and character size e A 1 wide template with normal characters can display 9 digits e A 1 wide template with quad characters can display 6 digits e A 1 wide template with double high characters can display 9 digits e A 2 wide template with normal characters can display 18 digits e A 2 wide template with quad characters can display 12 digits e A 2 wide template with double high characters can display 18 digits 10 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide Units Allows you to define the type of units that will be displayed to the operator such as Deg F or gals The Units field accepts alphanumeric characters This field is not displayed on a single width template when Value 2 is displayed Deci
271. ration the exported file does not maintain group attributes Ungroup Separates a group object into its individual component objects Bring To Front Brings the selected object s to the front top of a stack of objects If more than one object is selected the objects maintain their relative position in the stack Send To Back Sends the selected object s to the back bottom of a stack of objects If more than one object is selected the objects maintain their relative position in the stack Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 25 Align Opens a pop up menu that allows you to select the type of alignment you prefer All selected objects will be aligned with the last object selected Note that you can align objects lines rectangles etc but you cannot align templates Lefts Aligns the objects along their left edges Centers Aligns the objects along their vertical centerlines Rights Aligns the objects along their right edges Tops Aligns the objects along their top edges Middles Aligns the objects along their horizontal centerlines Bottoms Aligns the objects along their bottom edges Distribute Distributes or evenly spaces three or more selected objects vertically and horizontally Note that you can distribute objects lines rectangles etc but you cannot distribute templates Vertically Distributes the objects along their vertical centerlines Horizontally Distributes the objects along their horizontal centerlines Make
272. re allows you to configure Advanced Trending Templates which display a history of a reference s value over a period of time Advanced trending features 6 pens that can be triggered by time or event For information on configuring an Advanced Trending Template refer to the Line Trend Template topic Allen Bradley DH 485 The Allen Bradley DH 485 feature allows you to communicate to the Allen Bradley DH 485 Highway Modicon Modbus The Modicon Modbus feature allows you to communicate to Modicon PLCs via the Modicon Modbus or Modicon Modbus Plus Dynamic Graphics The Dynamic Graphics feature allows symbols to change colors and shapes dynamically on PanelMate Power Series 1500 models 1 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide 256 Greyscale Color Model 1555 1575 The 256 Greyscale Color Model 1555 1575 feature enhances the PanelMate Power Series 1500 If you have a PanelMate Power Series 1500 Model 1555 and you select the 256 Greyscale Color feature you will have 16 shades of gray instead of the standard 8 shades PowerAnimation and PowerBlink If you have a PanelMate Power Series 1500 Model 1575 and you select the 256 Greyscale Color feature you will have a 256 color palette instead of the standard 16 colors PowerAnimation and PowerBlink PowerAnimation allows you to create animation by defining a series of graphic objects which blink in sequence and PowerBlink allows you to create graphic objects which blink at differe
273. re information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 10 16 Configuration Editor User s Guide Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control The Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control is shown below Readout Template Readout Attributes Control Definitions Input Value Expression Po Target Word Address L J Password Protection None Control Type umenie The fields in the Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control are described below Input Value Expression Allows you to enter any mathematical expression that must be performed on the operator s input before the number is stored in the PLC A question mark inside brackets 7 is used to designate the operator input The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as is enter in the field Refer to the examples below 32 5 9 The operator s input is changed from Fahrenheit to Celsius
274. ree lines of normal size alphanumeric characters Use spaces or a carriage return to move the text to the desired location Note that on the configuration page the text displayed in the control button will be truncated but when in Run Mode the text will automatically wrap to the next line If the text wraps to the next line you can eliminate a carriage return in some cases The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference The PLC Bit Reference field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button Expressions or conditional logic cannot be entered If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 10 26 Configuration Edi
275. reen 2 27 Object Properties Attributes Tab The Object Properties Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Object Properties Ellipse Colors The Object Properties Attributes Tab dialog box allows you to change the color and pen width of a selected object The fields in the Object Properties Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Colors Pen Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the object The Pen button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Fill Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the object The Fill button will display the standard Color Selection Palette Pen Width Allows you to enter a pen width for the selected object 2 28 Configuration Editor User s Guide Object Properties Location and Size Tab The Object Properties Location and Size Tab dialog box is shown below Object Properties Ellipse Attributes Location in Pixels Size in Pixels Height 44 E width a a The Object Properties Location and Size Tab dialog box allows you to change the pixel location and size of a selected object The fields in the Object Properties Location and Size Tab dialog box are described below Location in Pixels X Allows you to move the object to the left or right on the configuration page The value entered in the X field determines the distance in pixels from the left edge of the page Y Allows you to move the o
276. register Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Chapter 10 Templates 10 53 Target Word Address Allows you to define the location of the operator s input in the PLC as the result of the Input For example to store a value in register 364 as a signed 16 bit integer use Target Word Address 364 S 16 Note that the example uses a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the template is configured to have numeric control a target address and input expression must be entered Failure to include this information will result in a Watchdog Time out error when the template is selected online Password Protection Allows you to lock out access to numeric entry unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit The selections are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswitch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B Password protection must be validated e
277. rives PanelMate Power Seres 3000 Grayscale E c CH5 The Export dialog box allows you to export a configuration file for the current Configuration Editor software version The Export selection and Import selection in the File Menu may be used to copy configurations from one personal computer to another After export a configuration PPS file can be copied to another computer and imported into another PanelMate database When using this method to copy configurations please note the following issues e Test message numbers in Display Templates and Variable Sized Display Templates are not exported Therefore all test message numbers in an imported configuration are set to zero 0 e Group attributes are not exported If a configuration had groups prior to export the imported configuration would show all objects ungrouped e The displayed states for Indicator Variable Sized Indicator and Variable Sized Graphic Templates are not exported On import the selected state of Variable Sized Indicators is set to state one 1 and Indicator Templates and Variable Sized Graphic Templates are set to state five 5 An alternate method for copying configurations from one system to another is by copying all database files to a new database directory on the target system Shareware zip and unzip utilities are available to easily do this via floppy disk This method will retain all Configuration Editor information including test messag
278. rmat specifier BSW can be added to swap the order of character presentation on a word by word basis The following table shows a block of generic PLC registers and the decimal hex and ASCII values for the registers Registers 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 Decimal Value 16706 17220 17734 18248 18762 19276 19790 20304 20818 21552 Hex Value 4142 4344 4546 4748 494A 4B4C 4D4E 4F50 5152 5354 ASCII Value AB CD EF GH IJ KL MN OP QR ST If the following expressions are entered in the Message Expression field the string will be displayed as shown below Message Expression 100 ASC20 100 BSW ASC20 105 ASC7 105 BS W ASC7 Displayed String ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST BADCFEHGJILKNMPORQTS KLMNOPQ LKNMPOR ASCII registers displayed in this manner will appear in normal font with white foreground and black background These display attributes font size foreground color and background color may be changed by defining them in the first two words of the string The most significant byte of the first word must contain a 1 This will signal the PanelMate unit that the attributes are to be altered The least significant byte of the first word must contain the font size key 01 Normal 02 Graphic 03 Double High 04 Quad 10 58 Configuration Editor User s Guide The most significant byte of the second word contains the foreground color and the least significa
279. rol buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at that location 11 36 Configuration Editor User s Guide Control Label Allows you to enter the control button label The Control Label field accepts three lines of normal size alphanumeric characters Use spaces or a carriage return to move the text to the desired location Note that on the configuration page the text displayed in the control button will be truncated but when in Run Mode the text will automatically wrap to the next line If the text wraps to the next line you can eliminate a carriage return in some cases The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference The PLC Bit Reference field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button Expressions or conditional logic cannot be entered If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references
280. rties 2 26 Object Properties Attributes Tab 2 27 Object Properties Location and Size Tab 2 28 Object Properties Visibility Tab 2 29 Online Labels 9 2 OPC Client Connectivity 7 19 OPC Setup 7 4 Open Bitmap File 2 43 Open Database 2 5 P Page Change with Delay Example 6 14 Page Properties 3 10 PLC Name and Port Table 7 2 PLC References C 2 Polygon Tool 2 41 Port Settings 7 6 Preface I Printing a Configuration Page 2 21 Problems with Configuration Editor F 2 Product Features 1 3 256 Color Greyscale Feature 1 3 Advanced Trending Template Feature 1 3 Capacity Expansion Kit Feature 1 3 Color Feature 1 3 DH 485 Feature 1 3 Graphics Feature 1 3 High Capacity Unit Feature 1 3 Modicon Modbus Feature 1 3 Product Ordering Service III R Readout Template 10 8 Readout Template Control Definitions Tab 10 14 Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control 10 15 Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control 10 16 Readout Template Expressions Tab 10 11 Readout Template Readout Attributes Tab 10 9 Readout Template Tool 2 44 Rectangle Tool 2 40 Register References within Messages 8 5 Binary Based Formats 8 9 Clock and Calendar References 8 11 Decimal Place Formats 8 9 Decimal Based Formats 8 9 General Format 8 6 General Format Examples 8 8 Reliance DCSNET Interface Drop 7 14 Remote I O Setup 7 10 Repair and Upgrade Service III R
281. s The Trend Scan Delay is configured in the System Parameters Communications Tab dialog box The following equation is used to calculate the time interval between trend samples Trend Scan Delay x Interval Sample Rate For example if the Trend Scan Delay is 2 seconds and the Interval is 3 the sample rate will be 6 seconds If the Interval trigger type is selected the Interval Expression field will be displayed Discrete Allows you to sample a trend value when an external value e g a bit reference in the PLC changes resulting in the Interval Expression value changing from false to true If the Discrete trigger type is selected the Discrete Expression field will be displayed Change Allows you to sample a trend value when the Value 1 Expression trend value changes If the Change trigger type is selected the Interval Discrete Expression field will not be displayed If the Line Trend Template has the Change trigger type configured and the source data is floating point instead of integer the data in the template will only update when the value prior to the decimal point changes When trending floating point values it is better to use either the Interval or Discrete trigger types Interval Expression Appears only when the Interval trigger type is selected The Interval Expression field determines the trend value sample rate The result of the Interval Expression multiplied by the Trend Scan Delay set in the System Parameters
282. s applications that use different color palettes 2 The video driver selected in the Windows Control Panel is not a 256 color driver 3 The selected video driver has a bug 1 Try switching out of the editor and back again or close the editor and re open it If these actions correct the problem then the video driver has a bug Proceed to corrective action 3 2 Select a 256 color driver from the video driver list in the Windows Control Panel 3 Contact the video card manufacturer for an updated version that corrects this driver PanelMate Series 1500 unit has sluggish performance when layered symbols are used and the Conditional Visibility feature is enabled Install the Dynamic Graphics option and use Variable Sized Graphic objects instead of layered symbols F 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide Index A AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address 7 9 About This Manual II Purpose II What s Inside II About PanelMate Configuration Editor 2 35 Active Rack Example 7 12 Advanced Trending Template Feature 1 3 Allen Bradley DH 485 Feature 1 3 Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup 7 10 Arc Tool 2 41 B Backup Database 2 7 Bar Template 10 18 Bar Template Bar Attributes Tab 10 19 Bar Template Control Definitions Tab 10 24 Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control 10 25 Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control 10 26 Bar Template Expressions Tab 10 2
283. s must be a multiple of 16 16 32 48 etc The pixel width of all V2 1X elements must be a multiple of 8 8 16 24 etc 2 18 Configuration Editor User s Guide If the page number or message number in a PanelMate Power Series configuration exceeds the maximum page number or maximum message number allowed in the V2 1X configuration software the page or message will not be exported For example if a PanelMate Power Series configuration has pages numbered 90 through 95 and you export the configuration to a PanelMate Series 2000 un expanded unit which can contain 10 pages numbered 0 9 no pages will be exported because all page numbers are greater than 9 A PLC configured on port 1 port 2 or I O is not supported by V2 1X A device driver associated with the default device name in the PLC Name And Port Table is not supported by V2 1X The PanelMate Series 2000 and PanelMate Series 3000 can have a maximum limit of 10 pages numbered 0 9 and 100 messages numbered 1 100 The PanelMate Series 2000 Expanded and the PanelMate Series 3000 Expanded can have a maximum limit of 30 pages numbered 0 29 and 500 messages numbered 1 500 The PanelMate Series 4000 can have a maximum limit of 10 pages numbered 0 9 and 250 messages numbered 1 250 The PanelMate Series 4000 Expanded can have a maximum limit of 30 pages numbered 0 29 and 500 messages numbered 1 500 PanelMate Power Series su
284. s the origin appears in the upper left corner The X and Y origin offset is 0 and 0 Refer to the figure below To offset the symbol so the origin appears in the center of the circle change the X and Y origin offset to 50 and 50 Refer to the figure below Now when symbol is used the location you click on the configuration page will be at the center of the circle instead of the upper left corner Chapter 6 System Parameters 6 1 System Parameters In this chapter you will learn e About the System Parameters General Tab dialog box e About the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box e About the System Parameters Communications Tab dialog box e About the System Parameters Remote Tab dialog box 6 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Parameters When you double click on the System Parameters selection in the Database Treeview Window the System Parameters dialog box will appear System Parameters are a set of four tabbed dialog boxes used to edit system parameters The System Parameters are used by the PanelMate unit while it is in Run Mode The dialog boxes are listed below e System Parameters General Tab e System Parameters Password Tab e System Parameters Communications Tab e System Parameters Remote Tab Chapter 6 System Parameters 6 3 System Parameters General Tab The System Parameters General Tab dialog box is shown below System Parameters x General Password Co
285. s you to determine if the default buttons will appear on the screen of your touchscreen unit Note that if you do not want the Default Buttons to appear you must select the Flexible Page Layout field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box and de select the Default Buttons box Alarm Table Allows you to determine if alarms will appear on the screen of your touchscreen unit Note that if you do not want alarms to appear you must select the Flexible Page Layout field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box and de select the Alarms Table box Cancel Key Allows you to determine if the CANCEL key will appear on the screen of your touchscreen unit Note that if you do not want the CANCEL key to appear you must select the Flexible Page Layout field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box and de select the Cancel Key box Font Editor In this chapter you will learn e About the Font Editor e About character sets Chapter 4 Font Editor 4 1 4 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Font Editor When you double click on the Normal Graphic Double High or Quad selection under Screen Fonts in the Database Treeview Window the Font Editor dialog box will appear Test Test Configuration One Font Editor i Eg One Font Editor Test Configuration One Font Editor i Eg Normal Font to Use K English Selected Font Selected Character ASCII Char 22 kl Recall key LER
286. s you to enter the width of the Variable Sized Display Template Note that you can also re size the width of the template by dragging the middle selection handle square on the right of the template Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the variable sized template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Direction Allows you to select the orientation in which the message is displayed The selections are Horizontal left to right and Vertical top to bottom Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 31 Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Variable Sized Display Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations It is not recommended to use the Conditional Visibility feature with Variable Sized Display Templates If a message is updated due to a PLC reference change it may display the message regardless of the Visibility Expressi
287. sed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to 0 thus providing a momentary input to the PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic The fields in the Variable Sized Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control are described below Control Indicator Position Allows you to select the position inside of the Variable Sized Readout Template for control indicator arrow The selections are listed below e Left e Below e Right e Above When redefined fonts are used the position of the control indicator arrow for a Variable Sized Readout Template may appear in the wrong position in Run Mode Display Allows you to determine if the arrow will always be visible or visible only when the template is selected The selections are Always and On Selection Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 25 Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control button labels and the associated PLC Bit Reference Line corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all control buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at that location Control Label Allows you to enter the control button label The Control Label field accepts three lines of normal size alphanumeric ch
288. selected in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box Once one or both fields are selected the characters must be redefined in the Font Editor before the characters will appear in the Preview field in the System Online Labels dialog box 9 4 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Online Labels Miscellaneous Soft Key Prompts When Miscellaneous Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Options r Preview Startup Labels Standard Allow Label Set Switching Label Category to Edit Miscellaneous Soft Rey Prompts E User Online Label Standard Online Label Change Online Labels View or Acknowledge Alarms Get Page Directory Scroll Up Scroll Down Acknowledge Selected Alarm Acknowledge Al Alarms Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Miscellaneous Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels Change Online Labels View or Acknowledge Alarms Get Page Directory Scroll Up Scroll Down Acknowledge Selected Alarm Acknowledge All Alarms Get Alarm Page Host Display
289. sibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags 10 56 Configuration Editor User s Guide Display Template Expressions Tab The Display Template Expressions Tab dialog box is shown below Display Template Display Attributes Line Message Expression Test Msg H 1 1 Hessage Expression J Test Message Number al Message Library The fields in the Display Template Expressions Tab dialog box are described below Line Message Expression Test Msg Displays line numbers message expressions and test message numbers configured for the Display Template The Line Message Expression Test Msg box may contain up to three message expressions Each line represents a single message and is numbered 1 2 and 3 at the left of the line Message Expression A
290. sponding conditional expression becomes true Conditional Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression The conditional expression can be a numerical logical or relational expression that evaluates to true or false When a numerical expression is evaluated if the result is even least significant bit 0 the value is false and if the result is odd least significant bit 1 the value is true If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags In Run Mode if an expression is satisfied true or false the characteristics defined for that line are used to display the template If more than one expression is satisfied at the same time the line with the highest priority displays Line 1 has the highest priority and line 5 has the lowest When an expression results in an invalid equation e g division by zero etc no value or graphics are displayed If a true expression goes false in a later scan the display for the true expression is erased Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 41
291. ss F1 The Configuration Editor uses the Status Bar at the bottom of the window to display messages and information about the current status of the application Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 39 Tool Palette When the Tool Palette is selected in the View Menu the Tool Palette will display when you open a page The Tool Palette buttons are listed below Selection BY rectangle SI paryon Bitmap m Bar Template S Line Trend Template VS Bar Template VS Graphic Template Ex Reshape Ellipse Text E Indicator Template call Bar Trend Template Display Template VS Readout Template VS Control Button iin ae Symbol ex Readout Template Table Template VS Indicator Template VS Display Template 2 40 Configuration Editor User s Guide Selection Tool The Selection tool allows you to select objects on the current page A selected object is enclosed in a bounding box having handles small squares at the corners of the bounding box and at the center of every side Use the Selection tool to drag the handles to re size or re shape the object To select more than one object press the Shift key while you click the desired objects You can also use the Selection tool to draw a dotted selection box marquee around multiple objects to select them Reshape Tool The Reshape tool allows you to re shape selected arcs and polygons To reshape an arc or polygon 1 Select the Reshape tool
292. ssage expression can be as simple as a word reference e g 253 or a mathematical expression which solves to a value corresponding to a message number e g 254 12 The message expression can contain multiple PLC references Note that the preceding examples are shown using a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references When the Message Expression is true embedded references are updated on the screen and not sent to the printer Messages configured for BOTH or PRINTER are sent to the printer when the Message Expression changes and also when changing pages Note that when going to a new page that has non global messages messages set for PRINTER or BOTH will print once for each PLC reference in the message expression Non global messages on a page set for PRINTER or BOTH will print when returning from the Alarm Page Screen Blanking and when pressing the Enable Fault Relay control button since these actions are treated as page changes Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 33 When running online if the message expression results in a value less than O or greater than permitted then the previously displayed message will be erased Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information The Variable Sized Display Template also supports the display of ASCII strings from the PLC To display ASCII strings place the startin
293. stic information n Motor Overtemperature The actual creation of the message is done in the Message Library selected from the Variable Sized Display Template Expressions Tab dialog box The Variable Sized Display Template consists of three tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Varlable Sized Display Template VS Display Attributes Tab e Varlable Sized Display Template Expressions Tab e Varlable Sized Display Template Control Definitions Tab 11 30 Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Display Template VS Display Attributes Tab The Variable Sized Display Template VS Display Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Yanable Sized Display Template Fa 5 Display Attributes Control Definitions Pixel Location Template Size in Characters s 268 a Y 249 a Height 1 Width z a Refresh Affected Graphics Online Direction Horizontal Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression Po j The fields in the Variable Sized Display Template VS Display Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Pixel Location X Allows you to enter the X location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Display Template Y Allows you to enter the Y location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Display Template Template Size In Characters Height Displays the height of the Variable Sized Display Template as 1 This value cannot be changed Width Allow
294. t is odd least significant bit 1 the value is true In Run Mode if an expression is satisfied true or false the characteristics defined for that line are used to display the template If more than one expression is satisfied at the same time the line with the highest priority displays Line 1 has the highest priority and line 5 has the lowest When an expression results in an invalid equation e g division by zero etc no value or graphics are If a true expression goes false in a later scan the display for the true expression is erased If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Indicator Label Allows you to enter a label for the Indicator Template This field accepts normal sized characters entered in the Indicator Label box The Indicator Template will limit the number of characters you can enter depending upon the template size normal or double wide or character size normal double high or quad Be sure to view the template on the page to ensure the desired appearance T
295. t floating point number between 1 20x10 38 and 3 40x10 38 using the IEEE format The 32 bits contain three fields e 1 sign bit e Fight bit biased exponent e 23 bit mantissa with a 24 implicit normalized bit The normalized bit is always 1 for non zero numbers The bit is recognized implicitly and not stored The decimal point is placed immediately to the right of the implicit normalized bit The exponent has a bias of 7F HEX 127 decimal The mantissa is precise to seven decimal places The PanelMate unit does not convert the bits in the PLC to any other data type but reads the bits as they are stored in the PLC The PLC stores the bits as shown below MSE Se bos Ve pete ew Che eared 4 LSB 1 Bit 8 Bits 23 Bits Sign Exponent Mantissa When the number of significant digits in a value exceeds the number of digits for the display the value is displayed in exponential notation provided the length of the value field is equal to or greater than e five for positive numbers e six for negative numbers The exponential format is e n nnnE nn for negative exponents e Jn nnnE nn for positive exponents Note that seven significant digits not including the sign and decimal point are valid If the field is longer than seven significant digits the additional information may be erroneous When you send data to the PLC the PanelMate unit deletes any high order bits above the range allowed BCD and
296. t the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box e About the Port Settings dialog box e About the Unsolicited Device dialog box e About the Generic Protocol dialog box e About the AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address dialog box e About the Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup dialog box e About the GE Fanuc Genius I O dialog box e About the Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop dialog box e About the DeviceNet Setup dialog box e About the Tag Name File dialog box e About OPC Client Connectivity e About DDE Client and Server Communications 7 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide PLC Name and Port Table When you double click on the PLC Name and Port Table selection in the Database Treeview Window the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box will appear PLC Name and Port T able Port Parameters Port Device Use Local ID 2 No Usage i70 Unequipped No interface board a Device Use Local ID Ha Usage x 2 PLC Hame Parameters ltem Hame Fort Hodel Remote Tag File Path k Name Change Copy Paste Delete Hame pict Hodel E Tagname Default Port El Remote ID fo PLC Name The PLC Name and Port Table dialog box allows you to set communication port parameters PLC device names and ID numbers The fields in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box are described below Port Parameters Port Device Use Local ID Displays the configurable ports installed on your PanelMate unit the device assigned to the port and the local
297. t the time a page change from the PLC occurs the CANCEL key will need to be pressed to initiate the page change If the Allow Immediate Page Change field is not selected the page change will not occur until all templates and variable sized templates are de selected such as when the CANCEL key has been pressed Chapter 6 System Parameters 6 5 Direct Select Touchscreen Only Allows one touch selection on touchscreen units for variable sized templates For example instead of having to step through multiple objects to get to a variable sized template you can touch the object to immediately select it The Direct Select feature also enables one touch operation for the Variable Sized Control Buttons For more information about Variable Sized Control Buttons refer to the Variable Sized Control Button Template topic Note that The Direct Select Touchscreen Only feature is intended for use on PanelMate touchscreen units and PanelMate PC units only Flexible Page Layout Allows you to use the entire 640 x 464 pixel page for templates and PowerGraphics When the Flexible Page Layout box is selected you can determine which flexible items will not appear on the page by de selecting the Page Status Banner box Alarm Table box Cancel Key box or Default Buttons box in the New Configuration Page dialog box or the Page Properties dialog box Refer to the New Configuration Page or Page Properties topic for more information Note that if a flexible
298. tants that solve to a value namel1 242 name2 243 Information from multiple PLCs can be included in the same expression In this expression word 242 in PLC namel is added to word 243 in PLC name 2 Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information 10 22 Configuration Editor User s Guide Value 2 Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Bar Template When viewing the Bar Template Value 2 will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units Value 2 is displayed as a medium intensity horizontal line to the right of the Value 1 bar e For PanelMate Color units Value 2 is displayed as a white horizontal line to the right of the Value 1 bar It is most often used as the setpoint for the device The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information High Alarm Allows you to enter a High Alarm Expression The results of the High Alarm Expression are
299. tch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B The Maintenance Template will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option which may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC For additional information about Maintenance Templates see the Maintenance Template topic For more information about the Maintenance Template topic refer to the Maintenance Template topic in the Online Operation User s Guide Flexible Page Layout The Flexible Page Layout feature is intended for use on touchscreen units only If a flexible item appears on top of a template or graphic on your configuration page the underlying template or graphic will be deleted when the configuration is exported Page Status Banner Allows you to determine if the Page Status Banner will appear on the screen of your touchscreen unit Note that if you do not want the Page Status Banner to appear you must select the Flexible Page Layout field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box and de select the Page Status Banner box Default Buttons Allow
300. tem Parameters General Tab dialog box The table below lists the fonts and the number of characters that can be edited Number of Number of Fonts Standard Font Characters Extended Font Characters Normal 10 138 ASCII characters 22 31 ASCII characters 22 31 and 128 255 Graphic 26 154 ASCII characters 101 126 ASCII characters 101 126 and 128 255 Double High 126 254 ASCII characters 1 126 ASCII characters 1 126 and 128 255 Quad 126 254 ASCII characters 1 126 ASCII characters 1 126 and 128 255 If you have strings using extended font characters and you disable the Enable Extended Fonts field in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box the strings will be truncated after and including the first character from the extended area characters 128 255 of the font when the configuration is exported To access the extended fonts the Enable Extended Fonts field must be selected in the System Parameters General Tab dialog box Note that when redefining a character or editing a character that already exists In a font the font will be changed on all pages where it is used Selected Character ASCII Char Displays the ASCII character number for the character selected in the character selection window Recall Key Displays the recall key or combination of keys you must enter to get the character to display Character Selection Window Displays characters from the character set you sele
301. tes Touchscreen Keypad Entry Labels Touchscreen Control Keys and the Switch To Two Column Keypad and Switch to Three Column Keypad labels from the Setup Page are lost during export These Online Labels are not supported by V2 1X e The Refresh Background Graphics Online feature on the Variable Sized Graphics Template VS Graphics Attributes Tab dialog box is not exported This option is not supported by V2 1X Chapter 2 Main Screen 2 17 V2 1X Export Errors Before the configuration file is exported the configuration file is checked for features not supported by V2 1X configuration software If there are features that cannot be exported you will see one or more of the following error messages X Y Any element is positioned on the top or bottom row or the right hand column X must be a multiple of 8 Y must be a multiple of 16 X must be a multiple of 8 Y must be a multiple of 16 Set this option on the V2 1X Options dialog box if graphics are used Symbols and static graphics containing PowerGraphics are not supported by V2 1X PowerGraphics include lines rectangles polygons ellipses and arcs PanelMate Power Series templates such as Line Trend and Variable Sized Control Button are not supported by V2 1X PanelMate Power Series units have an additional row at the top and bottom of the display and an additional column at the left side The pixel height of all V2 1X element
302. the server name and the access path name When selected the OPC Server Setup for Device dialog box will appear PLC Name and Port Table zl Port Parameters Port Device Use Local ID 1 OPC Server l i 2 No Usage Port Settings 1 0 Unequipped No interface board Unsolicited Device Device Use Local ID OPC Server gt 0 r PLC Name Parameters Item Name Port Model Remote Tag File Path amp Name D 2 lt New entry gt OPC Server Setup For Device plci x Paste Server Name Delete SST CNIOOpcSvr 1 Name pic1 Model OPC Setup Tag File Access Path Name Sst CN 250 ABL5550 9 Port 1 z Remote ID 00 rss pict wa NOTE The format for determining an access path is server dependent Le The OPC Server option is only available for PanelMate PC Pro configurations For more information refer to OPC Client Connectivity Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table 7 5 lt DDE Setup gt This button only appears when DDE Server is selected in the Device Use field and a device name is selected in the PLC Name Parameters that is assigned to the DDE Server When selected the DDE Server Setup for Device dialog box will appear PLC Name and Port Table F Port Parameters Port Device Use Local ID 1 DDE Server 8 2 No Usage Port Settings 1 0 Unequipped No interface board Unsolicited Device Device Use Local ID DDE Server Ei 0 PLC Name Par
303. the standard Color Selection Palette 10 42 Configuration Editor User s Guide PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference The PLC Bit Reference field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button Expressions or conditional logic cannot be entered If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 10 Templates 10 43 Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control The Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control is shown below Bar Trend Template Bar Trend Attributes Control Definitions Input Yalue Expression Po Target Word Address E Password Protection None Control Type eee The fields in the Bar Trend Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control are described below Input Value Expression Allows you to enter any mathematical expression that must be performed on the operator s input before the number is stored in the PLC A question mark inside brackets 7 is used to designate the operator input The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well
304. tion Allows you to determine the highest point of the Value bar This value displays on the template This six character text box accepts 6 digits or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the field On a 3 high Bar Template the PanelMate unit will use the Maximum and Minimum Calibrations to calculate the bar s midpoint and will place that value on the template Min Calibration Allows you to determine the lowest point of the Value bar trend This value displays on the template This six character text box accepts 6 digits or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the field On a 3 high Bar Template the PanelMate unit will use the Maximum and Minimum Calibrations to calculate the bar s midpoint and will place that value on the template Deadband Range Allows you to enter a number between 0 99 that will represent the percentage of the high alarm value minus the low alarm value that defines the width of the deadband The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value that must be crossed before Value is considered to have returned to normal status go out of alarm The deadband range prevents multiple alarm messages from being generated when Value is hovering around an alarm threshold Alarm Acknowledge Allows you to determine if the associated alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm is removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is selected the operator m
305. tion of the control arrow for a Variable Sized Graphic Template is placed inside the symbol at it s origin the control arrow may be overwritten even if the Control Indicator Display field is configured as Always To avoid overwriting the control arrow reposition the control arrow to the left of the symbol origin by eight pixels by configuring the Control Indicator Arrow X and Y fields X Allows you to move the control indicator arrow in the Variable Sized Graphic Template to the left or right Note that this field is disabled until you configure the Control Label field or the Bit Reference field Y Allows you to move the control indicator arrow in the Variable Sized Graphic Template up or down Note that this field is disabled until you configure the Control Label field or the Bit Reference field Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 43 Arrow Allows you to choose the position of the control indicator arrow The selections are listed below e Right e Left Up e Down e Right Up e Right Dn e Left Up e Left Dn Display Determines if the arrow is always visible or visible only when the template is selected Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control button labels and the associated PLC Bit Reference Line corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all control buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at
306. tment Soft Key Prompts User Online Label Standard Online Label Adjust Contrast Invert Lighter Darker Save Setting Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Contrast Adjustment Soft Key Prompts is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Adjust Contrast e Invert e Lighter e Darker e Save Setting 9 14 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Online Labels Touchscreen Button Templates When Touchscreen Button Templates is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Online Options Startup Labels Standard gt Allow Label Set Switching Preview Cleaning Mode Label Category to Edit Touchscreen Button Templates User Online Label Standard Online Label Cleaning Mode Calibrate Touchscreen Cleaning Graphic Mode Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Touchscreen Button Templates is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determ
307. to note that if you attempt to layer more than two symbols and use the Enable Conditional Visibility feature to display different states of a symbol on a PanelMate Power Series 1500 unit the PanelMate unit s performance may be sluggish If this occurs the Dynamic Graphics option should be installed and Variable Sized Graphic objects should be used to display the different symbol States Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the symbol will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the symbol will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode lt Origin gt Opens the Symbol Origin dialog box This button allows you to change the selected symbol s Origin Offset Chapter 5 Symbol Library 5 5 Symbol Origin When you press the Origin button on the Symbol Properties dialog box the Symbol Origin dialog box will appear Symbol Origin Warming Changing the origin effects ALL occurences of this Symbol in this Configuration Symbol Origin Offset The Symbol Origin dialog box allows you to change the offset of the selected symbol s origin A CAUTION Changing the origin affects ALL occurrences of this symbol in this configuration The fields in the Symbol Origin
308. tor User s Guide Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control The Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control is shown below Bar Template Bar Attributes Control Definitions Input Value Expression E Target Word Address L Password Protection None Control Type er The fields in the Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control are described below Input Value Expression Allows you to enter any mathematical expression that must be performed on the operator s input before the number is stored in the PLC A question mark inside brackets 7 is used to designate the operator input The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as is enter in the field Refer to the examples below 32 5 9 The operator s input is changed from Fahrenheit to Celsius gt 0 lt 100 lt 0 123 gt 100 123 Target Word Address is 123 This expr
309. tor that a control function is available Chapter 10 Templates 10 15 Readout Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control The Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control is shown below Readout Template Readout Attributes Control Definitions Control Label PLC Bit Reference 1 Control Label PLC Bit mj Relerence Ba Control Type Ere The Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box with button control defines the control buttons on your PanelMate unit If a control button is defined a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available When a control button is pressed the PanelMate unit sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit e g 120 00 to 1 When the button is released a separate command is sent to set the bit to 0 thus providing a momentary input to the PLC If a maintained input is desired the bit may be latched in PLC logic The fields in the Readout Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Label PLC Bit Reference Displays the control button labels and the associated PLC Bit Reference Line corresponds to the top control button line 2 corresponds to the next control button down etc It is not necessary to use all control buttons Simply leave a line blank if you do not want a control button at that location Contro
310. trol Button Template to start machinery or to perform page changes make sure you label the template clearly so it can be easily recognized and make the template large enough to ensure easy one touch operation This button is not labeled the same as standard control buttons You must supply the appropriate dynamics graphics static graphics and or text for the button Note that if you wish to use a dynamic graphic to label the Variable Sized Control Button you must follow the steps below e Configure the Lens Color field in the Variable Sized Control Button VS Control Button Attribute Tab dialog box as transparent by selecting None for the color e Place the dynamic graphic and or text behind the Variable Sized Control Button by selecting the button and choosing the Bring to Front selection in the Object Menu If these steps are not performed the areas in the Variable Sized Control Button covered by the dynamic graphic used in the label will not respond to the touch The Variable Sized Control Button Template consists of two tabbed dialog boxes that are listed below e Variable Sized Control Button Template VS Control Button Attributes Tab e Variable Sized Control Button Template Control Definitions Tab Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 45 Variable Sized Control Button Template VS Control Button Attributes Tab The Variable Sized Control Button Template VS Control Button Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Van
311. tton and drag to create an ellipse While using this tool press the Shift key to constrain the ellipse to a circle Arc Tool The Arc tool allows you to draw an arc chord or pie shaped object on the page Place the cursor on the configuration page press the mouse button and drag to create an arc While using this tool press the Shift key to constrain the arc to a circular shape To draw a chord or pie shape 1 Draw an arc 2 Reshape it using the Reshape tool For information on the Reshape tool refer to the Reshape Tool topic The maximum arc size that can be displayed in Run Mode is 358 To check the arc size double click on the arc to open the Object Properties dialog box Polygon Tool The Polygon tool allows you to place a polyline a jagged line or a closed polygon multi sided figure on the configuration page To create a polyline Select the polygon tool 2 Click to place the first point then release the mouse button As you move the mouse a rubber band line follows the cursor 3 Click to place the next point Continue until the polyline is complete To create a polygon 1 Perform steps 1 3 under Creating A Polyline to draw the polygon shape 2 Place the last point very near the first one It is not necessary to place it exactly on top The polygon is automatically completed Note that you may use the Reshape tool to reshape a polyline or a polygon For more information on the Resha
312. tton will be truncated but when in Run Mode the text will automatically wrap to the next line If the text wraps to the next line you can eliminate a carriage return in some cases The Control Label field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Control Label check the Control Button Labels box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box FG Allows you to select the foreground color or intensity for the control label The FG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette BG Allows you to select the background color or intensity for the control label The BG button will display the standard Color Selection Palette PLC Bit Reference Allows you to enter a PLC bit reference The PLC Bit Reference field accepts alphanumeric characters that define the PLC bit to be set while an operator presses the corresponding control button Expressions or conditional logic cannot be entered If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 15 Variable Sized Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control The Variable Sized Bar Templates Control Definitions Tab dialog box with numeric control is s
313. tware screen in the Windows clipboard Note that any graphics software package can be used to edit and print the image by choosing the Paste selection within the graphics software package The following steps use the Paintbrush software as an example Minimize the PanelMate software to an icon Open the Paintbrush software and maximize the screen Under the View Menu in Paintbrush deselect the Tools and Linesize and Palette selections This step allows the entire configuration page to be displayed Under the Edit Menu choose the Paste selection and the configuration page image will be pasted from the Windows clipboard You may edit the configuration page image or print the page as it appears For information on editing the configuration page image in the Paintbrush software refer to the steps below I 2 3 Select the Cutout tool and outline the desired part of the page you wish to print Under the Edit Menu choose the Cut selection to cut the desired part of the page Under the File Menu choose the New selection to start a new session Under the Edit Menu choose the Paste selection to paste the contents of the clipboard on the new screen Print the page 2 22 Configuration Editor User s Guide Edit Menu The Edit Menu is shown below Object View Window t Unda Heda Cut Ctrl Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Delete Del Select All Select Next Tab Select Previous Shift T ab Snap Io Grid Objects can
314. ty Allows you to determine if the Bar Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibility Expression If the Enable Conditional Visibility box is not checked the template will always appear on the page It is important to note that a template which is invisible because the Visibility Expression evaluates to false will still impose the same memory and polling response impact as when the template is visible Therefore the visibility feature should not be used to circumvent page number or capacity limitations Visibility Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression if the Enable Conditional Visibility box is checked If the Visibility Expression evaluates to false equal to zero the template will be erased and all template updating will be deactivated when in Run Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode 10 20 Configuration Editor User s Guide If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the LJ button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 10 Templates 10 21 Bar Template Expression Tab The Bar Template Expressions Tab dialog box is shown below Bar Template Bar Attributes
315. u to enter a title for the Units column in the Table Template The Units Tag field accepts up to 5 normal sized characters Password Protection Allows you to lock out access to numeric entry unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit The selections are listed below e None e Keyswitch Only e Keyswitch and Password A e Keyswitch and Password B e Keyswitch and Password A or B e Password A Only e Password B Only e Password A or B Password protection must be validated each time the template is selected for numeric entry The template will not be displayed unless the operator provides the correct password or unlocks the security keyswitch wired to the PanelMate unit Password A and Password B are defined in the System Parameters Password Tab dialog box The security keyswitch is an option that may be ordered as a spare part from the Cutler Hammer Customer Service Department Note that a security keyswitch cannot be connected to the PanelMate Power Series 1500 and are not available for PanelMate PC Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Enable Conditional Visibility Allows you to determine if the Table Template will appear on a page based on the value of the Visibil
316. uchscreen Keypad Entry Labels System Online Labels Touchscreen Control Keys Chapter 107 Tenplialesu uuu yu u D S i Sa haw uw AS lid a or Lempa viccestetscocaiassssoansinace seat heccodaidaatadeaecccwssieashobasbarcuneh aeo a Ea Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Tab Indicator Template Indicator States Tab Indicator Template Control Definitions Tab Readout Templi ou uususa sun uusha bu S SOS amankay uigpat awam aussuuk u n caeteensarudanns Readout Template Readout Attributes Tab Readout Template Expressions Tab Readout Template Control Definitions Tab Bar TODI aa a e O samita suis E Bar Template Bar Attributes Tab l aed A eas Bar Femplate Expression Tabire a a a Bar Template Control Definitions Tab TaoTao AN kaspa asam uu Saam a uuu wm bes Table Template T able Attributes Ta
317. ue Expression Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Table Template This expression is any mathematical operation to be performed on the monitored value before it is displayed on the screen If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations 10 32 Configuration Editor User s Guide The following examples of expressions use a generic format Refer to the appropriate Communication Driver Manual for information regarding the format for specific PLC word references 123 The expression can be a single word reference This example references word 123 123 10 124 This mathematical expression includes PLC references and constants that solve to a value namel 242 name2 243 Information from multiple PLCs can be included in the same expression In this expression word 242 in PLC namel is added to word 243 in PLC name 2 Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Input Value Expression Allows you to enter any mathematical
318. un Mode If the Visibility Expression evaluates to true not equal to zero the template will appear and all template updating will be activated when in Run Mode If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 10 Templates 10 5 Indicator Template Indicator States Tab The Indicator Template Indicator States Tab dialog box is shown below Indicator Template Indicator Attributes Indicator States Control Definitions Indicator Label Conditional Expression Alm Ack 5 gt gt Conditional Expression Indicator Label AAA Alarm Fg Alarm Bg X Acknowledge The fields in the Indicator Template Indicator States Tab dialog box are described below Indicator Label Conditional Expression Alm Ack Displays five lines that define various states of the device This includes indicator label text conditional expressions alarm status and acknowledgment status Conditional Expression Allows you to enter a conditional expression The conditional expression can be a numerical logical or relational expression that evaluates to true or false When a numerical expression is evaluated if the result is even least significant bit 0 the value is false and if the resul
319. us I O must be selected in the Device Use field in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box 2 Click the Genius I O button and the GE Fanuc Genius I O dialog box will appear The GE Fanuc Genius I O dialog box is shown below GE Fanuc Genius 1 0 PORTH 1 0 Global Data Length Ct The fields in the GE Fanuc Genius I O dialog box are described below Port Displays the I O port that was selected in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box Global Data Length Specifies the number of bytes of Global Data the PanelMate unit will transmit each bus scan onto the Genius I O bus The valid range for Global Data Length is 0 to 128 bytes 0 to 64 words For more information about Genius I O refer to the GE Fanuc Communication Driver Manual 7 14 Configuration Editor User s Guide Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop To configure the Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop dialog box the following steps must be completed 1 The I O port must be selected and Reliance DCSNet must be selected in the Device Use field in the PLC Name and Port Table dialog box 2 Click the DCSNet button and the Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop dialog box will appear The Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop dialog box is shown below Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop PORTH I O Drop Setting il is Drop Depth fi E The Reliance DCSNet Interface Drop dialog box is used to configure the PanelMate unit for DCSNet communication The fields in the Reliance DCSN
320. ust acknowledge the corresponding alarm message before the alarm will be removed from the alarm list If the Alarm Acknowledge box is not selected the alarm message will be automatically removed from the list when the alarm condition clears Note that a cleared alarm message will be sent to the printer if one is configured 10 24 Configuration Editor User s Guide Bar Template Control Definitions Tab The Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box is shown below Bar Template Control Type None The fields in the Bar Template Control Definitions Tab dialog box are described below Control Type Allows you to define the control type used for the template The selections are described below None Allows the template to show a value that the operator cannot control Buttons Requires the operator to use control buttons to change a setpoint value If you choose Buttons the dialog box will change Refer to the Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Button Control topic for more information Numeric Requires the operator to enter a setpoint value If you choose Numeric the dialog box will change Refer to the Bar Template Control Definitions Tab with Numeric Control topic for more information Note that if Numeric or Button is selected a small arrow will display in the lower left corner of the template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available Chapter 10 Templates 10 25
321. ust asin m nuna ee 2 37 SSUES D rusak z anat k uuu a onosueukataeSAcnsnaneeaenades 2 38 MOOV Pale Cle uu cna bie tease eliedatcei usa Siete a Dua Saa huahana eee anus 2 39 SElE COON Loo lexis ent au uum muspa tua uma usata asa una tua mus ukana a a 2 40 F li DpO TOL aac vcstsorccsarasasssauamiatere ine tact to tesa saa asqpsatumsspusa a a a kasbtuksssnsmayoskss 2 40 Luc T oo oas uuu m muu uuu aaa sasa ug ise ata aasan uu 2 40 FReclansler Tool sQ m u np uusha suku au A 2 40 PMT SCT OO leas yu o susunan m buana amami au ama busi ismu bm aa i aba 2 41 aN geod OQ manas scu nya maaa Susana See ae ett Teter ear aan trey ete arn enter ised Ty tec 2 41 Poly Gon WOO ernia sapaska nkuna a aD sau AGO aun n p ead Marea amin dene 2 41 GRE TOOL zu antamanta amia Avian the Mela econ edhe a ian ht AE Maks cece cc ETAT 2 41 Sy ADOT OO ss sia aga unu E suu ua su ma usus a as 2 42 SC C O VND Oaer a usuyasa stabastsasauuma shina E AS 2 42 LP i rT oO Summa E uyu aasan aasan E 2 43 Indicator Template FO lisse us uns suu ua Su uu ua ya yasa 2 44 Readout Template Tel yu anu tausug bau o hhujsusdsimuaua 2 44 Bar template Tolu uy unayna S n m um n naku u noa m manaa 2 44 Dar eng Template Tola uyu um n uuu k uuu a Gu D saa 2 44 Table Template OO knes aun mm a haapa i 2 44 ii Configuration Editor User s Guide ine Trend Te mpblaiesl oglu ay uuu ap aa Qum dus a Galau usta 2 44 Display Template Toba uuu un yan p asss ansa a si me makapas 2 45 Variable Sized Indicator
322. utes Tab dialog box are described below Device Name Allows you to enter a device name The device name will display in the upper area of the template in the normal font You may press the Return key to insert a carriage return The Device Name field has an auto centering capability If you wish to center the Device Name check the Device Names box in the Auto Centering field in the Configuration Properties dialog box Note that the name used in the Device Name field may be part of an alarm message Be aware that only 22 characters for the Device Name will appear when the alarm message displays in Run Mode The Device Name field allows you to enter more than 22 characters to allow for control key combinations for the redefined characters in the Font Editor For more information on redefined characters refer to the Font Editor topic Template Size In Cells Height Allows you to enter the height of the Bar Template as 2 or 3 Width Displays the width of the Bar Template as 1 This value cannot be changed Refresh Affected Graphics Online Allows all other templates variable sized templates and graphics that lie within the area of the template to be refreshed to properly reflect the layering of objects on the page whenever the template is updated Units Allows you to define the type of units that will be displayed to the operator such as Deg F or gals The Units field accepts alphanumeric characters Enable Conditional Visibili
323. vide the ability to create high density status displays One of 5 pre defined indicators can be used to indicate the status of a device To tie a state to information in the PLC a conditional expression may be entered which when evaluated to true displays the characteristics defined for that line The expression may be as simple as the condition of a single bit in the PLC true ON false OFF a value comparison register gt constant or a Boolean expression of up to 70 characters in length The Variable Sized Indicator Template consists of two tabbed dialog boxes which are listed below e Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator Attributes Tab e Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator States Tab Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 3 Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator Attributes Tab The Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Vanable Sized Indicator Template YS Indicator Attributes VS Indicator States Template Size in Pixels Pixel Location Li EE a Y 265 a Height a Width fie a Alarm Device Hame Refresh Affected Graphics Online Y Enable Conditional Visibility Visibilitu Expression a The fields in the Variable Sized Indicator Template VS Indicator Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Pixel Location X Allows you to enter the X location of the upper left corner of the Variable Size
324. w has been selected For example if an object is selected and the cursor is placed inside of the color selection palette and the Arrow keys are used to select different colors on the palette the Arrow keys cannot be used to move the selected object unless the configuration page and the object are re selected This also applies when an object is selected and the cursor is placed inside of the Select Font box or the Pen Width box on the toolbar Appendix F Configuration Editor Problems F 1 Configuration Editor Problems In this chapter you will learn e Solutions to some common Configuration Editor problems F 2 Configuration Editor User s Guide Configuration Editor Problems Some common configuration editor problems and solutions are listed below For information on online or transfer problems refer to the Online Operation User s Guide or the Transfer Utility User s Guide Configuration Editor could not open the database 1 Share exe is not loaded 2 The NetNamePath in the win ini file under Paradox Engine is not pointing to a valid pathname 3 pmconfig db is not found in the specified directory 4 The database path in pmconfig ini in Windows directory does not point to a valid database 5 The database resides on a shared drive on a network and is currently open by another user 6 The Configuration Editor terminated abnormally through a General Protection Fault or hardware powe
325. wass m u seed Sess u au Sau musu am a Ales ceed a aed ene 4 18 Chapter 5 SVMIDO LT DAry ose yu u u i S coccasseessccsvcotacsstectacecoeetscsesesssseeceeuys 5 1 Sy MD OL P iDr L y lt u secanes cscnsatoonatehssscasdusadeotes letcaceil aquaiebsnosasmcadesoaiiohcogatiaguaienerecneteachoreieebcsualizecnsa tes 5 2 Svinbol Propere Sic s a SS u uu um a a tata Shae ua has s coat t 5 3 S y MOV Sisaren uyana aha kasqanta nkaytunakapu E 5 5 Chapter 6 Syste pkParyame ters u u a wa 0 au ayasa gs 6 1 Syste Paramete Sear uD na ukna a A 6 2 System Parametrs General ab a ua uu A a E ua usss 6 3 System Parameters Password Tab u uu u aaa aspuyaquasqhapuaqunascqastaqyhuaqpiaasabaassaypsq 6 6 System Parameters Communications Tapu uu u yy a E Su a sa 6 9 System Pardimeters Remote Duy uu uu nu a uuu iss 6 11 Chapter 7 PLC Name and Port Table sireci l S y u usss 7 1 PLE Name and Port Fables y s Q a aS i aS ukasa a Ruana ukasa 7 2 PORES aun uusunu muu u Sur sum E 7 5 Upsohe ted Devi Zuhal Gum aaa usata E 7 6 GENETIC PLOLOCOl i aiao a bataacannadeiuanseceusacsaneh selantaaleenaseiunccadahiacnaneheatanses ENO 7 7 AB DH 485 Maximum Node Address 7 8 Allen Bradley Remote I O Setup a 7 9 GE Famme Gemus VO u u e assaka Saakawasaasaqaaqkhtapkama qhuya A E 7 12 Reliance DCS Net Intemace DI0
326. werAnimation and PowerBlink PowerAnimation allows you to create animation by defining a series of graphic objects which blink in sequence and PowerBlink allows you to create graphic objects which blink at different rates Auto Centering Device Names Allows you to automatically center all Device Names within templates which have Device Names on all pages of this configuration Indicator Labels Allows you to automatically center all Indicator Labels within the Indicator Template label area on all pages of this configuration Control Button Labels Allows you to automatically center all Control Button Labels for all templates which have control buttons defined on all pages of this configuration Chapter 3 Database Treeview Window 3 5 New Configuration Page When the Configurations Pages icon is selected and the New button is clicked in the Database Treeview Window the New Configuration Page dialog box will appear Hew Configuration Page Page Humber o E Title Untitled Protection Hone Maintenance Templates Allow on Page Enable Writes Protection Hone E Flexible Page Layout X Page Status Banner X Cancel Key PX Alarm Table X Default Buttons The New Configuration Page dialog box is used to determine features for individual configuration pages and to determine features for the Maintenance Template For more information about the Maintenance Template refer to the Maintenance Template topic For
327. ws are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Modbus and Modbus Plus are trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc Remote I O DH 485 Data Highway and Data Highway Plus are trademarks of Allen Bradley Company Inc Genius I O is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc DCS NET is a trademark of Reliance Electric Company Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Commercial names of products from other manufacturers or developers that appear in this manual are registered or unregistered trademarks of those respective manufacturers or developers which have expressed neither approval nor disapproval of Cutler Hammer products Copyright Cutler Hammer Inc 2000 All rights reserved P N 01 00443 01 Table of Contents i Table of Contents Pielace A kaun aksa IEE EASE EIE I E EEE EAE EEI N EEEIEE EIS I ADO TI SNIaiil u uns s A enam E II PUDO SE ta nuusan u zu sai us saus aaa Saywa aaa pu a umusas II What s hisrkleuausapansnapa unakuy tra ierign Caen Trier nee aT taa samaspa kausana nce ann er II SUPPOR Soi VICCS ou uum zy huu 2 mmm sua Sick out um sa E a E HI Chapter 1 Installing the Configuration Software 1 1 Installing the Configuration Software 1 2 PROGUGCE PE Att CS uuu u naman E accent ulaniawle tad diion dese canmsea duos ivaade
328. xpression word 242 in PLC namel is added to word 243 in PLC name 2 Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information Value 2 Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Readout Template When viewing the Readout Template Value 2 will be at the bottom of the template It is most often used as the setpoint for the device The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information 10 12 Configuration Editor User s Guide High Alarm Allows you to enter a High Alarm Expression The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression If Value 1 exceeds the High Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the template will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units the template will be displayed with medium intensity characters on a blinking high intensity background
329. xpressions Tab dialog box are described below Expressions Value Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the bar height displayed in the Variable Sized Bar Template The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the Ls button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information High Alarm Allows you to enter a High Alarm Expression The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression If Value exceeds the High Alarm Expression value an alarm message is placed in the alarm list When in an alarm state the bar color will be displayed as follows e For PanelMate Grayscale units the Variable Sized Bar template is displayed with medium intensity characters on a blinking high intensity background e For PanelMate Color units the variable sized template is displayed in white with a blinking red background Note that if the high alarm value is greater than or equal to the Max Calibration value the entire bar will be displayed in w
330. y Rey to Cont Invalid Entry Reenter the Password Invalid Entry Improper Confirmat ion Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box when Error Messages is selected in the Label Category to Edit field Tip When changing online labels be aware of the spaces before and after the new label The spaces will determine the placement of the label when the PanelMate unit enters Run Mode Standard Online Labels e Hardware Selection Disabled Change Selection e Invalid Entry Press Any Key to Continue e Invalid Entry Reenter the Password e Invalid Entry Improper Confirmation Reenter the Password 9 10 Configuration Editor User s Guide System Online Labels Miscellaneous Text When Miscellaneous Text is selected in the Label Category to Edit field the following dialog box will appear System Online Labels Ed Online Options _ r Preview Startup Labels Standard i Directory of Page Titles Allow Label Set Switching Label Category to Edit Miscellaneous Text User Online Label Standard Online Label Directory of Fage Titles Fress Directory for Additional Fages ALARM FAGE HOST DISPLAY WINGO SETUP PAGE PAGE N CONTROL Current Date Label Font Directory of Page Titles Graphic Double High Quad The following set of online labels can be edited in the System Online Labels dialog box whe
331. y Template VS Display Attributes Message Expression E Test Message Number fo a Global Message Message Library The fields in the Variable Sized Display Template Expressions Tab dialog box are described below Message Expression Allows you to enter a message expression in the Variable Sized Display Template The result of the Message Expression represents the number of the message from the Message Library that will be displayed If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags If the Message Expression results in a number greater than the maximum number allowed in the Message Library or less than 0 when running online the previously displayed message will be erased If the message expression results in an invalid equation e g division by a value of zero etc no message displays If a message expression previously resulted in a valid value but in a later scan results in an invalid equation the previously displayed message will be erased To display a message based on a bit multiply the bit reference times the message number to produce the message number For example to display message 25 when bit 127 14 is on enter 127 14 25 in the Message Expression field The me
332. yed in the Alarm Color field high intensity The trend sample will continue to be displayed in the alarm color as other trend samples are being collected as long as Value is less than the Low Alarm Expression value A Low Alarm bar is shown in high intensity to the left of the Line Trend Template e For PanelMate Color units the trend sample is displayed in the Alarm Color field The trend sample will continue to be displayed in the alarm color as other trend samples are being collected as long as Value is less than the Low Alarm Expression value A Low Alarm bar is shown in red to the left of the Line Trend Template The Low Alarm Expression can include multiple PLC word and bit references Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication division addition and subtraction You may also enter a single constant value e g 900 as an expression Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the El button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags This is an optional entry If no alarm is desired for this device leave this field blank Refer to the list of Conditional Expression Operators for more information 10 52 Configuration Editor User s Guide Line Trend Template Contr
333. your tag names and references by using the LJ button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Chapter 11 Variable Sized Templates 11 21 Variable Sized Readout Template Expression Tab The Variable Sized Readout Template Expressions Tab dialog box is shown below VYVarnable Sized Readout Template Fa Expressions Value High Alarm Low Alarm Deadband Range 0 X Alarm Acknowledge The fields in the Variable Sized Readout Template Expressions Tab dialog box are described below Expressions Value Allows you to enter a value expression The result of this expression will be the value displayed in the Variable Sized Readout Template The expression entered may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed as well as mathematical operations Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations If you have an associated csv file for tags you can access your tag names and references by using the button You can also access them by entering a left bracket or by entering a comma after entering the PLC device name For more information on tags refer to Chapter 12 Using Tags Note that if a value is too large to display in the variable size template a string of Xs XXXXX will be displayed for the value For example if a Variable Sized Readout Template
334. zed Bar Template Control Definitions Tab Configuration Editor User s Guide Variable Sized Bar Template VS Bar Attributes Tab The Variable Sized Bar Template VS Bar Attributes Tab dialog box is shown below Varnable Sized Bar Template ws Bar Attributes Control Definitions Pixel Location Template Size in Pixels ts Y 270 al Height jas a Width fie a Alarm Device Hame Colors 8 7 2 7 Bar Erase Refresh Affected Graphics Online Direction Up Enable Conditional Visibility Visibility Expression fT The fields in the Variable Sized Bar Template VS Bar Attributes Tab dialog box are described below Pixel Location X Allows you to enter the X location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Bar Template Y Allows you to enter the Y location of the upper left corner of the Variable Sized Bar Template Template Size In Pixels Height Allows you to enter the height in pixels for the Variable Sized Bar Template Note that you can also re size the template by dragging one of the selection handles squares in any direction Width Allows you to enter the width in pixels for the Variable Sized Bar Template Note that you can also re size the template by dragging one of the selection handles squares in any direction Alarm Device Name Allows you to enter a device name to be used as part of an alarm message The Alarm Device Name field accepts normal sized characters T

PanelMate Power Pro Configuration Editor Software User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents